Panasonic | DMC-GH1K | Operating instructions | Panasonic DMC-GH1K digital SLR camera

Panasonic DMC-GH1K digital SLR camera
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 1 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Operating Instructions
Digital Camera/Lens Kit
Model No.
DMC-GH1K
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product,
please read the instructions completely.
For USA and Puerto Rico assistance, please call: 1-800-211-PANA(7262) or,
contact us via the web at: http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
For Canadian assistance, please call: 1-800-99-LUMIX (1-800-995-8649) or
send e-mail to: lumixconcierge@ca.panasonic.com
VQT2A61
PP
until
2009/4/30
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 2 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
Dear Customer,
Thank you for choosing Panasonic!
You have purchased one of the most sophisticated and reliable products on the market
today. Used properly, we’re sure it will bring you and your family years of enjoyment.
Please take time to fill in the information on the below. The serial number is on the tag
located on the underside of your Camera. Be sure to retain this manual as your
convenient Camera information source. Please note that the actual controls and
components, menu items, etc. of your Digital Camera may look somewhat different from
those shown in the illustrations in these Operating Instructions.
Carefully observe copyright laws.
• Recording of pre-recorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material for purposes
other than your own private use may infringe copyright laws. Even for the purpose of private
use, recording of certain material may be restricted.
A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers the product you have
purchased. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
recycle this battery.
Before Use
Information for Your Safety
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE,
• DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE, DRIPPING OR
SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES,
SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
• USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
• DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO USER SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
THE SOCKET OUTLET SHALL BE INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT AND SHALL
BE EASILY ACCESSIBLE.
Product Identification Marking is located on the bottom of units.
2
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 3 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN CANADA.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
THE FOLLOWING APPLIES ONLY IN THE U.S.A.
FCC Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Caution: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation
instructions and use only shielded interface cables with ferrite core when
connecting to computer or peripheral devices.
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name: Panasonic
Model No.:
DMC-GH1
Responsible party: Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094
Support Contact: Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company 1-800-211-PANA (7262)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
DMC-GH1
VQT2A61
3
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 4 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
∫ About the battery pack
CAUTION
Battery pack (Lithium ion battery pack)
• Use the specified unit to recharge the battery pack.
• Do not use the battery pack with equipment other than the specified unit.
• Do not get dirt, sand, liquids, or other foreign matter on the terminals.
• Do not touch the plug terminals (i and j) with metal objects.
• Do not disassemble, remodel, heat or throw into fire.
If any electrolyte should come into contact with your hands or clothes, wash it off
thoroughly with water.
If any electrolyte should come into contact with your eyes, never rub the eyes. Rinse
eyes thoroughly with water, and then consult a doctor.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
• Do not heat or expose to flame.
• Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of
time with doors and windows closed.
Warning
Risk of fire, explosion and burns. Do not disassemble, heat above 60 xC (140 oF) or
incinerate.
∫ About the battery charger
CAUTION!
• DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE, BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN
ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT
CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION
VENTS.
• DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS WITH NEWSPAPERS,
TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS.
• DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE
UNIT.
• DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY MANNER.
Battery charger/AC adaptor
This battery charger/AC adaptor operates on AC between 110 V and 240 V.
But
• In the U.S.A. and Canada, the battery charger/AC adaptor must be connected to a 120 V
AC power supply only.
• When connecting to an AC supply outside of the U.S.A. or Canada, use a plug adaptor to
suit the AC outlet configuration.
• When connecting to a supply of greater than AC 125 V, ensure the cord you use is suited to
the voltage of the AC supply and the rated current of the battery charger/AC adaptor.
• Contact an electrical parts distributor for assistance in selecting a suitable AC plug adaptor
or AC cord set.
4
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 5 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
• The battery charger is in the standby condition when the AC power supply cord is connected.
The primary circuit is always “live” as long as the power cord is connected to an electrical
outlet.
∫ Care of the camera
• Do not strongly shake or bump the camera by dropping or hitting it. Do not subject to
strong pressure.
The camera may malfunction, recording pictures may become impossible, or the lens, the LCD
monitor or the external case may be damaged.
• Be particularly careful in the following places as they may cause this unit to
malfunction.
– Places with a lot of sand or dust.
– Places where water can come into contact with this unit such as when using it on a rainy day
or on a beach.
• Do not touch the lens or the sockets with dirty hands. Also, be careful not to allow
liquids, sand and other foreign matter to get into the space around the lens, buttons etc.
• This camera is not waterproof. If water or seawater splashes on the camera, use a dry
cloth to wipe the camera body carefully.
If the unit does not operate normally, please contact the dealer where you purchased the
camera or the repair service center.
• Do not place your hands inside the mount of the digital camera body. Since the sensor
unit is a precision apparatus, it may cause a malfunction or damage.
∫ About Condensation (When the lens or the Viewfinder is fogged up)
• Condensation occurs when the ambient temperature or humidity changes. Be careful of
condensation since it causes lens stains, fungus and camera malfunction.
• If condensation occurs, turn the camera off and leave it for about 2 hours. The fog will
disappear naturally when the temperature of the camera becomes close to the ambient
temperature.
∫ Read together with the “Cautions for Use”. (P166)
-If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
VQT2A61
5
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 6 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Contents
Before Use
Information for Your Safety....................... 2
Standard Accessories............................... 9
Names of the Components..................... 11
Operating the Front Dial ......................... 14
Rotating the LCD monitor ....................... 14
About the Lens ....................................... 15
Preparation
Attaching/Detaching the Lens................. 17
Attaching the Shoulder Strap.................. 19
Attaching the Lens Hood ........................ 20
Charging the Battery............................... 21
• About the Battery (charging/number
of recordable pictures) ..................... 22
Inserting/Removing the Battery .............. 24
Using the AC Adaptor............................. 25
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)......26
About the Card ....................................... 27
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set) ................ 28
• Changing the clock setting ............... 28
Setting the Menu .................................... 29
• Setting menu items........................... 30
Setting the Quick Menu .......................... 32
About the Setup Menu............................ 33
Holding and using your camera.............. 39
Basic
Selecting the [REC] mode, and record
still picture or motion picture................... 42
• Taking the still picture....................... 44
• Recording the motion picture............ 44
• Playback the recorded still pictures
or motion picture .............................. 44
Taking pictures using the automatic
function (Intelligent Auto Mode).............. 45
• Scene detection................................ 46
• Face Recognition ............................. 47
• AF Tracking Function ....................... 47
• Compensating the Exposure ............ 47
• About the flash ................................. 48
• Taking motion pictures using the
automatic function ............................ 48
6
VQT2A61
• Settings in Intelligent Auto Mode ...... 49
Taking pictures with your favorite
settings (Program AE Mode) .................. 51
• Fix the focus by pressing the shutter
button halfway (AFS)........................ 52
• Continuously focusing on a subject
(AFC)................................................ 52
• Take a picture with Manual Focus
(MF).................................................. 52
• Focusing ........................................... 53
• When the subject is not in focus....... 53
• Preventing jitter (camera shake)....... 53
• Program Shift.................................... 54
Taking Pictures with the Zoom ............... 55
• Using the Optical Zoom/
Using the Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)/
Using the Digital Zoom ..........................55
Playing back Pictures ............................. 56
• Changing the Information Displayed
on the playback screen .................... 57
• Displaying Multiple Screens
(Multi Playback)................................ 57
• Displaying Pictures by Recording
Date (Calendar Playback) ................ 58
• Using the Playback Zoom................. 58
Deleting Pictures .................................... 59
• To delete a single picture ................. 59
• To delete multiple pictures (up to 50)
or all the pictures.............................. 60
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Switching the display of the LCD
Monitor/Viewfinder.................................. 61
• Switching the displayed information .....61
Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash ......65
• Switching to the appropriate flash
setting............................................... 65
• Adjust the flash output ...................... 69
• Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro... 70
Compensating the Exposure .................. 71
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode.......... 72
Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket........ 74
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer ......... 76
Setting the method used to focus
(AF mode)............................................... 77
• Setting up [ ] (AF Tracking) .......... 78
• Setting the AF area........................... 79
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus........ 80
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 7 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure
(AF/AE Lock)........................................... 81
Adjusting the White Balance ................... 83
• Setting the white balance manually ....84
• Setting the color temperature............84
• Finely adjusting the white balance ....85
• White Balance Bracket...................... 85
Setting the Light Sensitivity..................... 86
Change tone of the color for the picture
to be taken (Film Mode) .......................... 87
• Adjusting each film mode to the
desired setting .................................. 88
• Multi Film Bracket .............................89
Taking pictures by specifying the
aperture/shutter speed............................ 90
• Aperture-priority AE .......................... 90
• Shutter-priority AE.............................90
Taking picture by setting the exposure
manually..................................................91
Confirm the effects of aperture and
shutter speed (Preview Mode) ................93
• Confirm the effects of aperture ......... 93
• Confirm the effects of shutter
speed................................................93
Taking expressive portraits and landscape
pictures (Advanced Scene Mode) .............. 94
• [PORTRAIT].....................................95
• [SCENERY]...................................... 95
• [SPORTS] ........................................ 96
• [CLOSE-UP].....................................96
• [NIGHT PORTRAIT].........................97
Taking pictures that match the scene
being recorded (Scene Mode) ................98
• ï [SUNSET] ...................................98
• 2 [PARTY] ...................................... 99
• : [BABY1]/; [BABY2] ..................99
• í [PET] ......................................... 100
Taking pictures while adjusting color
(My Color Mode) ...................................100
Registering Personal Menu Settings
(Registering custom settings) ............... 101
Taking pictures in Custom Mode ..........102
Recording Motion Picture...................... 103
• Changing [REC MODE] and
[REC QUALITY].............................. 105
• [WIND CUT] .................................... 107
Recording Motion Picture with Manual
Settings (Creative Motion Picture Mode) ... 108
Taking a picture with Face Recognition
function ................................................. 110
• Face Recognition functions............. 110
• Face settings...................................110
Useful Functions at Travel Destinations... 113
• Recording which Day of the
Vacation You Take the Picture .......113
• Recording Dates/Times at Overseas
Travel Destinations (World Time) ...115
Using the [REC] Mode Menu ................116
• ? [ASPECT RATIO] .....................116
• @ [PICTURE SIZE].......................117
• A [QUALITY] ................................118
•
[FACE RECOG.].......................118
• C [METERING MODE].................119
•
[STABILIZER]...........................119
•
[FLASH]....................................120
•
[D.RED-EYE]............................120
•
[FLASH SYNCHRO].................120
•
[FLASH ADJUST.]....................121
•
[I.EXPOSURE] .........................121
•
[EX. OPT. ZOOM] ....................121
• ) [DIGITAL ZOOM]......................121
•
[BURST RATE].........................122
•
[AUTO BRACKET] ...................122
•
[SELF-TIMER] ..........................122
•
[COLOR SPACE] .....................122
•
[LONG SHTR NR] ....................123
•
[ISO LIMIT SET] .......................123
•
[ISO INCREMENTS] ................123
• B [AUDIO REC.] ..........................124
Using the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode
Menu .....................................................124
•
[REC MODE] ...........................124
•
[REC QUALITY] ......................125
•
[EXPOSURE MODE]...............125
•
[WIND CUT] ............................125
Using the [CUSTOM MENU].................125
Advanced (Playback)
Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures
with Audio .............................................131
• Motion pictures................................131
• Pictures with audio..........................132
Using the [PLAYBACK] mode menu.....132
•
[SLIDE SHOW].........................132
•
[PLAYBACK MODE].................134
• Ü [FAVORITE] .............................134
•
[TITLE EDIT] ............................135
•
[TEXT STAMP].........................136
• Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture
size (number of pixels) .............138
•
[TRIMMING] .............................139
VQT2A61
7
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 8 ページ
•?
•N
•
•P
•B
•
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
[ASPECT CONV.] .................... 140
[ROTATE]/M [ROTATE DISP.] .... 141
[PRINT SET] ............................ 142
[PROTECT].............................. 143
[AUDIO DUB.].......................... 144
[FACE RECOG.] ...................... 145
Connecting to other equipment
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen .....146
• Playing back pictures using the AV
cable (supplied).............................. 146
• Playing back pictures on a TV with
an SD Memory Card slot................ 147
• Playing back on the TV with HDMI
socket............................................. 147
Saving the recorded still pictures and
motion pictures ..................................... 151
• Copy the playback image using an
AV cable......................................... 151
• Copying to a PC ............................. 152
Connecting to a PC .............................. 152
Printing the Pictures ............................. 155
• Single picture.................................. 156
• Print Settings .................................. 156
• [PRINT SET (DPOF)] ..................... 158
Others
Using an external flash (optional) ......... 159
Using the Protector/Filter (optional)...... 160
Using the Remote Shutter (optional) .... 161
Using an external microphone
(optional)............................................... 162
Screen Display ..................................... 163
Cautions for Use................................... 166
Message Display .................................. 170
Troubleshooting.................................... 173
Number of Recordable Pictures and
Available Recording Time..................... 181
Specifications ....................................... 186
Digital Camera Accessory System ....... 190
Digital Camera Accessory Order Form
(For USA and Puerto Rico Customers).....191
Request for Service Notice
(For USA and Puerto Rico Only) .......... 192
Limited Warranty
(For USA and Puerto Rico Only) .......... 193
8
VQT2A61
Customer Services Directory
(For USA and Puerto Rico Only) .......... 195
Index..................................................... 196
Useful Information
(For Latin American Countries Only) .... 199
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 9 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
Before Use
Standard Accessories
Check that all the accessories are included before using the camera.
1 Digital Camera Body
(This is referred to as camera body in these operating instructions.)
2 Interchangeable Lens
“LUMIX G VARIO HD 14– 140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.”
(This is referred to as lens in these operating instructions.)
3 Battery Pack
(This is referred to as battery in these operating instructions.)
Charge the battery before use.
4 Battery Charger/AC Adaptor
(This is referred to as charger in these operating instructions.)
5 AC Cable
6 DC Cable
7 AV Cable
8 USB Connection Cable
9 CD-ROM
• Software:
Use it to install the software to your PC.
10 Shoulder Strap
11 Body Cap
(This is attached to the camera body at the time of purchase.)
12 Lens Hood
13 Lens Cap
(This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.)
14 Lens Rear Cap
(This is attached to the interchangeable lens at the time of purchase.)
15 Lens Storage Bag
• SD Memory Card and SDHC Memory Card are indicated as card in the text.
• The card is optional.
• Description in these operating instructions is based on the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included
in the DMC-GH1K.
• For information about optional accessories, refer to the “Digital Camera Accessory System”.
(P190)
• If any accessories are lost, customers in the USA and Puerto Rico should contact Panasonic’s
parts department at 1 800 833-9626 and customers in Canada should contact 1 800 99-LUMIX
(1-800-995-8649) for further information about obtaining replacement parts.
VQT2A61
9
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 10 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
1
2
3
H-VS014140
6
7
VEK0N98
11
10
VQT2A61
DMW-BLB13PP
8
5
DE-A49B
9
K2CA2EA00002
10
K1HA14CD0001 K1HA14AD0001
12
VKF4385
4
13
VYC0997
VFC4411
14
VYF3250
15
VFC4315
VFC4430
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 11 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
Names of the Components
∫ Camera body
1 Flash (P65)
2 Sensor
3 Self-timer indicator (P76)
AF assist lamp (P128)
4 Lens release button (P18)
5 Lens lock pin
6 Mount
7 Lens fitting mark (P17)
8 Front dial (P47, 54, 57, 58, 71, 79, 85, 90, 91)
1 2
8
7 6
3
5
4
Front dial is described as follows in these operating instructions.
e.g.: Rotating left or right
e.g.: Pressing the front dial
• Refer to P14 for operation of the front dial.
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
[LVF/LCD] button (P41)
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Diopter adjustment dial (P41)
Viewfinder (P41, 62, 163)
Eye sensor (P41)
Playback button (P56, 59, 131, 146, 147, 148)
[AF/AE LOCK] button (P81)
Camera ON/OFF switch (P28)
Motion picture button (P44)
Eye Cup (P167)
LCD monitor (P39, 57, 61, 163)
17 18 19 20 21 22
[DISPLAY] button (P57, 61, 93)
Delete button (P59)/
Preview button (P93)
21 [MENU/SET] button (P28)
22 Cursor buttons
3/ISO (P86)
2/AF mode (P77)
4/Function button (P33)
Assign Menu to 4 button. It is convenient to register Menu that is used often.
[ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/[METERING MODE]/[I.EXPOSURE]/[GUIDE LINE]/
[
REC AREA]/[REMAINING DISP.]
1/WB (White balance) (P83)
VQT2A61
11
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 12 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
In these operating instructions, the cursor buttons are described as shown in the
figure below or described with 3/4/2/1.
e.g.: When you press the 4 (down) button
MENU
/SET
23 Focus mode dial (P44, 45, 51, 52, 77, 80,
104, 108)
24 Flash open lever (P65)
25 Stereo microphone (P104, 124, 144)
26 Drive mode lever
Single (P51):
Burst (P72):
Auto Bracket (P74):
Self-timer (P76):
27 Shutter button (P44)
28 Focus distance reference mark (P81)
29 Hot shoe (P159, 162)
30 Mode dial (P42)
31 Status indicator (P42)
32 [Q.MENU] button (P32)
33 [FILM MODE] button (P87)
34 [MIC/REMOTE] socket (P161, 162)
35 Shoulder strap eyelet (P19)
• Be sure to attach the shoulder strap when
using the camera to ensure that you will not
drop it.
36 [HDMI] socket (P147, 148)
37 [AV OUT/DIGITAL] socket (P146, 151, 153, 155)
Press 4
or
26
23 24 25
28
34
27
29 30 31 32 33
35
36
37
38 Card door (P26)
39 DC cable cover (P25)
38
39
12
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 13 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
40 Battery door (P24)
41 Release lever (P24)
42 Tripod receptacle
• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod
is stable when the camera is attached to it.
40 41
42
∫ Lens
H-VS014140 (LUMIX G VARIO HD 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.)
43 Tele
44 Lens surface
45 Focus ring (P80)
46 Wide
48
47 Zoom ring (P55)
48 [O.I.S.] switch (P18)
47
49 Contact point
49
43 44 45 46
50 Lens fitting mark (P17)
50
∫ Battery charger/AC adaptor (P21, 25)
51
52
53
54
Power input socket [AC IN]
[CHARGE] indicator
Power output socket [DC OUT]
Battery holder
51
52 53
54
VQT2A61
13
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 14 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
Operating the Front Dial
There are 2 ways to operate the front dial, rotating left or right, and deciding by pressing.
Example of operation
1 “Rotating”
2 “Pressing”¢3
Adjustments of
Program Shift
¢1 (P54), Aperture
(P90), Shutter
Speed (P90), etc.
Compensating the
exposure (P47, 71)
etc.
Multi (calendar)
Playback (P57),
Playback Zoom
¢2 (P58)
Normal playback
(while Multi
Playback), Move
images while
zoomed (while
using Playback
Zoom)
A Front dial
¢1 Recording
¢2 Playback
¢3 It functions in the same way as [MENU/SET] button in various settings including set and
finish.
Rotating the LCD monitor
At the time when this camera is purchased, the LCD monitor is stowed in the camera body.
Bring out the LCD monitor as shown below.
1 Open the LCD monitor. (Maximum 180o)
2 It can be rotated 180o forwards.
3 Return the monitor to its original position.
14
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 15 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
Rotation range of the LCD monitor
∫ Horizontal opening direction
∫ Vertical rotating direction
4 Maximum 180o
5 180o
• It can be rotated 180o forwards.
6 90o
• It can only be rotated 90o towards you.
Note
• Only rotate the LCD monitor after opening it wide enough, and be
careful not to use excessive force as it may be damaged.
• When holding the edge of the LCD monitor, there may be some
distortion, however this is not a malfunction. Moreover, this has no
effect on the taken pictures or playback.
• When not using the LCD monitor it is recommended that you close it
with the screen facing inwards to prevent dirt and scratches.
About the Lens
This unit can use the dedicated lenses compatible with the Micro Four Thirds™ System
lens mount specification (Micro Four Thirds mount) such as the LUMIX G VARIO HD
14 –140 mm/F4.0 –5.8 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S. lens included in DMC-GH1K.
Select a lens that matches the scene being recorded and your use of the pictures.
If you use a lens other than a dedicated interchangeable lens, auto focus cannot be
activated and accurate metering is not possible. Also, some functions will not work.
∫ “Micro Four Thirds Mount”
This is the lens mount standard for the
“Micro Four Thirds System”.
This was newly developed as
interchangeable lens dedicated for digital
cameras.
VQT2A61
15
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 16 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Before Use
∫ When using lenses other than the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 –5.8 lens included in
DMC-GH1K
• Depending on the type of lens, you may not be able to use some functions such as the direction
detection function (P40), [STABILIZER] (P119), Quick AF (P127) and Continuous AF (P127).
• The available flash range etc. differs depending on the aperture value of the lens you are using.
• Take some test pictures with the lens you are using.
• Lens with the Four Thirds™ mount
specification can be used by using the mount
adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional). Because of its
structure, Micro Four Thirds mount
specification lenses cannot be used on the
Four Thirds mount specification cameras. It
can only be used on the Micro Four Thirds
mount specification cameras.
Interchangeable lens that can be used with this unit and compatibility of the functions
(±: Usable, ¥: Some functions/features limited, —: Not usable)
when recording still pictures
Lens type
while recording motion pictures
Auto focus
Auto aperture
setting
Auto focus
Auto aperture
setting
Micro Four Thirds
mount specification
lens compatible to
motion pictures
(LUMIX G VARIO
HD)
±
([AFS], [AFC])
±
±¢2
±
Micro Four Thirds
mount specification
lens not compatible
to motion pictures
±
([AFS], [AFC])
±
¥¢2, 3, 4
¥¢5
Four Thirds mount
specification lens
compatible to
contrast AF¢1
¥
([AFS])
±
¥¢3, 4
¥¢5
Four Thirds mount
specification lens
not compatible to
contrast AF¢1
—
±
—
¥¢5
¢1 Mount adaptor (DMW-MA1; optional) is necessary to use with this unit.
¢2 When recording motion pictures, the focus is continuously adjusted for both [AFS] and [AFC]
(P52).
¢3 Fewer tracking functions are compatible than with the Micro Four Thirds mount specification
lens compatible with motion pictures. Also, the sound of auto focus operation may be
recorded.
¢4 Auto focus does not work and [MF] is used when recording with [REC MODE] set to
[AVCHD] and [REC QUALITY] set to [FHD] ([
]).
¢5 The sound of aperture operation may be recorded.
Refer to catalogues/Web pages for most current information regarding compatible lenses.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs (This Site is English only.)
16
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 17 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Preparation
Attaching/Detaching the Lens
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Close the flash.
Attaching a lens to the camera body
Turn the lens rear cap A and the body cap B in the direction of the
arrow to detach them.
• Do not put your hands inside the mount.
Align the lens fitting marks C (red
marks) on the camera body and the lens
and then rotate the lens in the direction
of the arrow until it clicks.
• Do not press the lens release button when you
attach a lens.
• Do not try to attach the lens when holding it at an
angle to the camera body as the lens mount may
get scratched.
• Check that the lens is attached correctly.
Detach the lens cap.
• Detach the lens cap before taking pictures.
VQT2A61
17
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 18 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
∫ Optical Image Stabilizer
The 14 –140 mm/F4.0 –5.8 lens included in the DMC-GH1K has a stabiliser function.
The Optical Image Stabilizer function is set for activation when the lens is attached to the
camera body.
Set the [O.I.S.] switch to [ON].
• You can change the Optical Image Stabilizer mode to
[MODE1], [MODE2] or [MODE3] using [STABILIZER] in
the [REC] mode menu. (P119) It is set to [MODE1] at the
time of purchase.
• We recommend setting the [O.I.S.] switch to [OFF] when
using a tripod. If the [O.I.S.] switch is set to [OFF], [
]
is displayed on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder.
Detaching a lens from the camera body
Attach the lens cap.
Press the lens release button D while
turning the lens as far as possible in the
direction of the arrow to detach it.
• Always attach the body cap to the camera body so
that dirt or dust does not get inside.
• Attach the lens rear cap so that the lens contact
point does not get scratched.
Note
• Change lenses where there is not a lot of dirt or dust. Refer to P167 when dirt or dust gets on
the lens.
• When you turn the camera off or carry the camera, attach the lens cap to protect the surface of
the lens.
• Be careful not to lose the lens cap, the lens rear cap and the body cap.
18
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 19 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Attaching the Shoulder Strap
• We recommend attaching the shoulder strap when using the camera to prevent it from
dropping.
Pass the shoulder strap through the
shoulder strap eyelet on the camera body.
A: Shoulder strap eyelet
Pass the end of the shoulder strap through
the ring in the direction of the arrow and
then pass it through the stopper.
Pass the end of the shoulder strap through
the hole on the other side of the stopper.
Pull the other side of the
shoulder strap and then check
that it will not come out.
• Perform steps 1 to 4 and then attach
the other side of the shoulder strap.
Note
• Be sure to follow the steps and attach the shoulder strap correctly.
• Check that the shoulder strap is firmly attached to the camera.
• Attach the shoulder strap so that the “LUMIX” LOGO is on the outside.
• Use the shoulder strap around your shoulder.
– Do not wrap the strap around your neck.
– It may result in injury or accident.
• Do not leave the shoulder strap where an infant can reach it.
– It may result in an accident by mistakenly wrapping around the neck.
VQT2A61
19
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 20 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Attaching the Lens Hood
In bright sunlight or backlight, the lens hood will minimize lens flare and ghosting. The lens
hood cuts off excess lighting and improves the picture quality.
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Close the flash.
Insert the lens hood into the lens
with the short sides at the top
and bottom, and turn in the
direction of the arrow until it
stops.
A Fitting to the mark.
∫ Temporarily storing the lens hood
1
Turn the lens hood in the direction of the arrow to
detach it.
2
Reverse the lens hood and then attach it in the
same way as shown previously.
• Attach the lens cap.
• When temporarily storing the lens hood, check that it is
firmly attached and that it does not appear in the picture.
Note
• Hold the short sides of the flower shaped lens hood when attaching or detaching it.
• When taking pictures with flash with the lens hood attached, the lower portion of the photo may
turn dark (vignetting effect) and the control of the flash may be disabled because the photo
flash may be obscured by the lens hood. We recommend detaching the lens hood.
• When using the AF assist lamp in the dark, detach the lens hood.
20
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 21 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Charging the Battery
∫ About batteries that you can use with this unit
The battery that can be used with this unit is DMW-BLB13PP.
It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the
genuine product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these
battery packs are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the
requirements of appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these
battery packs may lead to fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not
liable for any accident or failure occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit
battery pack. To ensure that safe products are used we would recommend that a
genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.
• Use the dedicated charger and battery.
• This unit has a function that can distinguish useable batteries. Exclusive batteries
(DMW-BLB13PP) are supported by this function. (Conventional batteries not supported
by this function cannot be used)
• The battery is not charged when the camera is shipped. Charge the battery before use.
• Charge the battery with the charger indoors.
• Charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC to 35 oC (50 oF to 95 oF). (The battery
temperature should also be the same.)
Connect the AC cable.
• The battery cannot be charged when the DC cable is
connected to the AC adaptor.
Attach the battery paying attention to the
direction of the battery.
• Charging starts when the [CHARGE] indicator A lights
green.
Detach the battery after charging is
completed.
• Charging is complete when the [CHARGE] indicator A
turns off.
VQT2A61
21
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 22 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
∫ When the [CHARGE] indicator flashes
• The battery temperature is excessively high or low. The charging time will be longer than
normal. Also, charging may not be completed.
• The terminals of the charger or the battery are dirty. In this case, wipe them with a dry cloth.
Note
• Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one.
• Disconnect the charger from the power outlet after the charging is completed.
• The battery becomes warm after using it and during and after charging. The camera also
becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• The battery will become discharged if left for a long period of time after being charged.
• The battery can be recharged even when it still has some charge left, but it is not
recommended that the battery charge be frequently topped up while the battery is fully
charged. (The battery has characteristics that will reduce its operating duration and cause the
battery to swell up.)
• When the operating time of the camera becomes extremely short even after properly charging
the battery, the life of the battery may have expired. Buy a new battery.
• Do not leave any metal items (such as clips) near the contact areas of the power plug.
Otherwise, a fire and/or electric shocks may be caused by short-circuiting or the
resulting heat generated.
About the Battery (charging/number of recordable pictures)
∫ Battery indication
The battery indication is displayed on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder.
[It does not appear when you use the camera with the AC adaptor (P25) connected.]
• The indication turns red and blinks if the remaining battery power is exhausted. (The status
indicator also blinks) Recharge the battery or replace it with a fully charged battery.
∫ The battery life
Number of
recordable
pictures
Approx.
300 pictures
Recording time
Approx.
150 min
(By CIPA standard in Program AE Mode)
Recording conditions by CIPA standard
• CIPA is an abbreviation of [Camera & Imaging Products Association].
• Temperature: 23 oC (73.4 oF)/Humidity: 50% when LCD monitor is on.¢
• Using a Panasonic SD Memory Card (512 MB).
• Using the supplied battery.
• Use the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K.
• Starting recording 30 seconds after the camera is turned on. (When the Optical Image
Stabilizer function is set to [MODE1].)
• Recording once every 30 seconds with full flash every second recording.
• Turning the camera off every 10 recordings and leaving it until the temperature of the battery
decreases.
¢ The number of recordable pictures decreases in Auto power LCD mode or Power LCD
mode. (P35)
22
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 23 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
The number of recordable pictures varies depending on the recording interval time.
If the recording interval time becomes longer, the number of recordable pictures
decreases.
[e.g. When recording once every 2 minutes, the number of recordable pictures
decreases to about 75.]
When using the viewfinder
Number of
recordable
pictures
Approx.
320 pictures
Recording time
Approx.
160 min
(By CIPA standard in Program AE Mode)
Playback time when using the LCD monitor
Playback time
Approx. 260 min
The number of recordable pictures and playback time will vary depending on the
operating conditions and storing condition of the battery.
Available continuous recording time when using the LCD monitor (when recording
motion pictures)
Available continuous
recording time
(motion picture)
Approx. 120 min
• Recorded continuously setting the recording mode to [AVCHD] and [REC QUALITY] to [SH]
([
])
Available recording time is different depending on the recording intervals or
conditions of use.¢
¢ Available recording time becomes shorter when turning the power [ON]/[OFF], start/stop of
the recording, etc. are repeated.
∫ Charging
Charging time
Approx. 155 min
• The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.
The charging time may vary depending on how the battery has been used. The charging
time for the battery in hot/cold environments or a battery that has not been used for long
time may be longer than normal.
When the charging has been completed successfully, the [CHARGE] indicator turns off.
Charging time and number of recordable pictures with the optional battery pack
(DMW-BLB13PP) are the same as above.
Note
• The battery may swell and its operating time may become shorter as the number of times it is
charged increases. For long term battery use, we recommend you do not frequently charge the
battery before it is exhausted.
• The performance of the battery may temporarily deteriorate and the operating time may
become shorter in low temperature conditions (e.g. skiing/snowboarding).
VQT2A61
23
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 24 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Inserting/Removing the Battery
• Check that this unit is turned off.
• Close the flash.
Slide the release lever in the direction of the
arrow (OPEN side) and then open the battery
door.
• Always use genuine Panasonic batteries
(DMW-BLB13PP).
• If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the
quality of this product.
Insert until it is locked by the lever A being
careful about the direction you insert it. Pull
the lever A in the direction of the arrow to
remove the battery.
1: Close the battery door.
2: Slide the release lever in the direction of
the arrow (LOCK side) and then close it
firmly.
Note
• Remove the battery after use.
• Do not remove the battery while the power is on as the settings on the camera may not be
stored properly.
• The supplied battery is designed only for the camera. Do not use it with any other equipment.
• Before removing the battery, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has gone off
completely. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be
damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.)
24
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 25 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Using the AC Adaptor
You can use the camera without worrying about battery discharge when it is connected to
a PC or a printer if you use the DC cable to connect the camera to the battery charger/AC
adaptor and connect the AC cable.
• Check that the camera is turned off.
• Close the flash.
Connect the AC cable.
Connect the DC cable A.
• Pull open the DC cable cover 1 and then
connect the DC cable to the camera body using
the same steps as “Inserting/Removing the
Battery” (P24). Pull the DC cable through the
opening as shown in the illustration and then
close the battery door.
• Be careful not to catch the DC cable when
closing the battery door.
• You cannot charge the battery if you connect the
DC cable.
Note
• Do not use any other AC cables except the supplied one.
• Do not use any other DC cables except the supplied one. If you use other DC cables, it may
cause a malfunction.
• The camera becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.
• Disconnect the charger/AC adaptor and DC cable when the camera is not in use.
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor when recording motion
pictures.
• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor the power supply is cut off due to a
power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not
be recorded.
• The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is
always “live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.
VQT2A61
25
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 26 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Inserting/Removing the Card (Optional)
• Check that this unit is turned off.
• Close the flash.
• We recommend using a Panasonic card.
Slide the card door to open it.
Push it fully until it clicks being careful
about the direction you insert it. To remove
the card, push the card until it clicks, then
pull the card out upright.
A: Do not touch the connection terminals of the card.
• The card may be damaged if it is not fully inserted.
1: Close the card door.
2: Slide the card door to the end and then
close it firmly.
• If the card door cannot be completely closed, remove
the card, check its direction and then insert it again.
Note
• Always turn the camera off before opening the card door.
• Before removing the card, turn the camera off, and wait until the status indicator has gone off
completely. (Otherwise, this unit may no longer operate normally and the card itself may be
damaged or the recorded pictures may be lost.)
26
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 27 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
About the Card
Access to the card
The access indication lights red when pictures are being recorded
on the card.
Card
The following types of cards can be used with this unit.
(These cards are indicated as card in the text.)
Type of card
SD Memory Card (8 MB to 2 GB)
(Formatted using the FAT12 or FAT16
format in compliance with the SD
standard)
SDHC Memory Card
(4 GB to 32 GB)¢
(Formatted using the FAT32 format in
compliance with the SD standard)
Characteristics
• Fast recording and writing speed
• Write-Protect switch A provided (When
this switch is set to the [LOCK] position,
no further data writing, deletion or
formatting is possible. The ability to
write, delete and format data is restored
when the switch is returned to its
original position.)
A
2
¢ The SDHC Memory Card is a memory card standard decided by the SD Association in 2006
for high capacity memory cards more than 2 GB.
¢ You can use an SDHC Memory Card in equipment that is compatible with SDHC Memory
Cards however you cannot use an SDHC Memory Card in equipment that is only compatible
with SD Memory Cards. (Always read the operating instructions for the equipment being
used.)
• You can only use cards with SDHC logo (indicating compliance with the SD standard) if using
cards with 4 GB or more capacity.
• It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when recording
motion pictures.
¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.
• Please confirm the latest information on the following website.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This Site is English only.)
Note
• Do not turn off the power or remove the battery, card, or the DC cable (when the AC
adaptor is in use), while the access indicator is lit, while writing, reading, or deleting the
picture, formatting (P38), etc. Also, do not apply vibration, shock, or static electricity to
the unit.
The card or the data on the card may be damaged, and this unit may no longer operate
normally.
If operation fails due to vibration, impact or static electricity, perform the operation again.
• The data on the card may be damaged or lost due to electromagnetic waves, static electricity or
breakdown of the camera or the card. We recommend storing important data on a PC etc.
• Do not format the card on your PC or other equipment. Format it on the camera only to ensure
proper operation. (P38)
• Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.
VQT2A61
27
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 28 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Setting Date/Time (Clock Set)
• The clock is not set when the camera is shipped.
Turn the camera on.
A [MENU/SET] button
ON
OFF
Press [MENU/SET].
MENU
/SET
Press 2/1 to select the items (year, month,
day, hour, minute, display sequence or time
display format), and press 3/4 to set.
:
:
A: Time at the home area
B: Time at the travel destination (P115)
‚: Cancel without setting the clock.
• Select either [24HRS] or [AM/PM] for the time display
format.
• AM/PM is displayed when [AM/PM] is selected.
• When [AM/PM] is selected as the time display format, midnight is displayed as AM
12:00 and noon is displayed as PM 12:00. This display format is common in the North
America and elsewhere.
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Turn the camera off after finishing setting the clock. Then turn it on and check that the
clock setting is correct.
• When [MENU/SET] has been pressed to complete the settings without the clock having
been set, set the clock correctly by following the “Changing the clock setting”
procedure below.
Changing the clock setting
Select [CLOCK SET] in the [SETUP] menu, and press 1. (P30)
• It can be changed in steps 3 and 4 to set the clock.
• Once a charged battery has been installed for 24 hours, the clock setting is maintained
for 3 months using the built-in clock battery even without the battery.
28
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 29 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Note
• The clock is displayed when [DISPLAY] is pressed several times during recording.
• You can set the year from 2000 to 2099.
• If the clock is not set, the correct date cannot be printed when you stamp the date on the
pictures with [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or order a photo studio to print the pictures.
• If the clock is set, the correct date can be printed even if the date is not displayed on the screen
of the camera.
Setting the Menu
This camera offers menu selections that allow you to customize its operation to maximize
your picture taking experience.
In particular, the [SETUP] menu contains some important settings relating to the camera’s
clock and power. Check the settings of this menu before proceeding to use the camera.
! [REC] mode menu (P116 to 124)
• This menu lets you
set the aspect ratio,
number of pixels and
other aspects of the
pictures you are
recording.
[MOTION PICTURE] mode menu
(P124 to 125)
• This menu lets you
set the [REC
MODE], [REC
QUALITY], and other
aspects for motion
picture recording.
[CUSTOM MENU] (P125 to 130)
• Operation of the unit,
such as displaying of
the screen and
button operations,
can be set up
according to your
preferences. Also, it
is possible to register the modified settings.
[SETUP] menu (P33 to 38)
• This menu lets you
perform the clock
settings, select the
operating beep tone
settings and set
other settings which
make it easier for
you to operate the camera.
[MY MENU]
• Up to 5 menu items
used recently can be
memorized. Items
used a lot can be
recalled easily.
( [PLAYBACK] mode menu (P132 to 145)
• This menu lets you
make the protection,
trimming or print
settings (DPOF), etc.
of recorded pictures.
Note
• There are functions that cannot be set or used depending on the modes or menu settings being
used on the camera due to the specifications.
VQT2A61
29
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 30 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Setting menu items
This section describes how to select the [REC] mode menu settings, and the same setting
can be used for the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, [CUSTOM MENU] menu, [SETUP]
menu, [MY MENU] menu and [PLAYBACK] mode menu as well.
• If you set [MENU RESUME] (P130) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON], the screen shows
the last selected menu item when the camera was turned off.
Example: Setting [I.EXPOSURE] from [OFF] to [HIGH] in the Program AE Mode
Turn the camera on.
A [MENU/SET] button
B Mode dial
Set the mode dial to [
ON
OFF
].
Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.
MENU
/SET
Switching to other menus
e.g.: Switching to the [SETUP] menu
1 Press 2.
2
Press 4 or rotate the front dial
to select the [SETUP] menu icon [
].
or
3
Press 1.
• Select a menu item next and set it.
30
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 31 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Press 3/4 or rotate the front dial to select
[I.EXPOSURE].
• Select the item at the very bottom, and press 4 or
rotate the front dial right to move to the next screen.
or
Press 1 or the front dial.
• Depending on the item, its setting may not appear or it
may be displayed in a different way.
or
Press 3/4 or rotate the front dial to select
[HIGH].
or
Press [MENU/SET] or the front dial to set.
MENU
/SET
or
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
VQT2A61
31
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 32 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Setting the Quick Menu
By using the Quick Menu, some of the menu settings can be easily found.
• The features that can be adjusted using Quick Menu are determined by the mode or a display
style the camera is in.
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu in recording status.
Q.MENU
Press 3/4/2/1 or rotate the front dial to select the menu
item and the setting.
• Menus that can be setup are displayed in orange when selected.
• Setup method is different as following depending on the displayed screen during
recording. Refer to P61 about the displayed screen.
[
] (LCD monitor style)
• Proceed to step 4 below after selecting the item and settings.
LCD recording information window in [
] (LCD monitor style)
• Select the item, press [MENU/SET], and then select the settings.
MENU
/SET
[
] (Finder style)
• Select the item, press the front dial, and then select the setting.
STD
STD
P
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB 9
P
STD
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB 9
P
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB 9
Press [MENU/SET] or the front dial to set the menu.
MENU
/SET
or
Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick Menu.
32
VQT2A61
Q.MENU
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 33 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Perform these settings if you need to.
About the Setup Menu
[CLOCK SET], [ECONOMY] and [AUTO REVIEW] are important items. Check their
settings before using them.
• In the Intelligent auto mode, only [CLOCK SET], [WORLD TIME], [BEEP] and [LANGUAGE]
can be set.
For details on how to select the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P30.
U [CLOCK SET]
Setting Date/Time.
• Refer to P28 for details.
Set the time in your home area and travel destination.
[WORLD TIME]
“ [DESTINATION]:
Travel destination area
– [HOME]:
Your home area
• Refer to P115 for details.
Set the departure date and the return date of the vacation.
— [TRAVEL DATE]
[TRAVEL SETUP]
[OFF]/[SET]
[LOCATION]
[OFF]/[SET]
• Refer to P113 for details.
Assign [REC] mode menu or [CUSTOM MENU] menu to 4
button. It is convenient to register functions that are used often.
[Fn BUTTON SET] [ASPECT RATIO]/[QUALITY]/[METERING MODE]/
[I.EXPOSURE]/[GUIDE LINE]/[
[REMAINING DISP.]
REC AREA]/
• Refer to P116 for details about [REC] mode menu.
• Refer to P125 for details about [CUSTOM MENU].
You can conserve the battery life by setting these menus.
Also, it will turn off the LCD monitor automatically when not in use
to prevent discharge of the battery.
q [ECONOMY]
p [POWER SAVE]:
The camera is automatically turned off if the camera has not been
used for the time selected on the setting.
[OFF]/[1MIN.]/[2MIN.]/[5MIN.]/[10MIN.]
[AUTO LCD OFF]:
The LCD monitor is automatically turned off if the camera has not
been used for the time selected on the setting.
[OFF]/[15SEC.]/[30SEC.]
VQT2A61
33
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 34 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
• Press the shutter button halfway or turn the camera off and on to cancel [POWER SAVE].
• [POWER SAVE] is set to [5MIN.] in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
• [POWER SAVE] is fixed to [2MIN.] when [AUTO LCD OFF] is set to [15SEC.] or [30SEC.].
• Press any button to turn on the LCD monitor again.
• It is recommended to use this mode with [LVF/LCD AUTO] (P126) in the [CUSTOM MENU]
menu is set to [OFF].
• [ECONOMY] does not work in the following cases.
– When using the AC adaptor
– When connecting to a PC or a printer
– When recording or playing back motion pictures
– During a slide show
Set the length of time that the picture is displayed after taking it.
[REVIEW]:
o [AUTO REVIEW]
[OFF]/[1SEC.]/[3SEC.]/[5SEC.]
[HOLD]:
The pictures are displayed until shutter button is pressed
halfway.
[ZOOM]:
The picture enlarged 4k is displayed.
[OFF]/[1SEC.]/[3SEC.]/[5SEC.]
• If [REVIEW] is set to [HOLD], the playback screen display can be switched (P57) during Auto
Review when taking pictures with the drive mode lever set to [
] (P51) or [
] (P76).
• When [HOLD] has been selected, the zoom time cannot be set.
• The Auto Review function is activated regardless of its setting when using Burst Mode (P72) or
Auto Bracket (P74) and when recording still pictures with audio (P124). (Will not enlarge/hold)
Also, you cannot set the Auto Review function.
• If [HIGHLIGHT] (P34) is set to [ON], white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white
when the Auto Review function is activated.
• [AUTO REVIEW] does not work when recording motion pictures.
[HIGHLIGHT]
When the Auto Review function is activated or when playing back,
white saturated areas appear blinking in black and white.
[OFF]/[ON]
• If there are any white saturated areas, we
[ON]
[OFF]
recommend compensating the exposure towards
negative (P71) referring to the histogram (P64) and
then taking the picture again. It may result in a better
quality picture.
• There may be white saturated areas if the distance
between the camera and the subject is too close
when taking pictures with the flash.
If [HIGHLIGHT] is set to [ON] in this case, the area directly illuminated by the photo flash will
become white saturated and appear blinking in black and white.
• The LCD/EVF will display overexposed portions of the image as white blinking areas. These
only exist on the camera’s display, not on the actual photo.
• This does not work while in Multi Playback (P57), Calendar Playback (P58), or Playback Zoom
(P58).
34
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 35 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
[MONITOR]/
[VIEWFINDER]
Brightness, color, or red or blue tint of the LCD monitor/viewfinder
is adjusted.
• Adjust the brightness of the screen with 3/4, contrast and saturation
with 2/1 or the front dial.
• When [DISPLAY] is pressed in screen shown right, it will switch to the
color adjustment screen. Adjust between red and green with 3/4, or
between orange and blue with 2/1 or the front dial.
• It will adjust the LCD monitor when the LCD monitor is in use, and the
viewfinder when the viewfinder is in use.
These menu settings make it easier to see the LCD monitor when
you are in bright places.
LCD [LCD MODE]
[OFF]
„ [AUTO POWER LCD]:
The brightness is adjusted automatically depending on how bright
it is around the camera.
… [POWER LCD]:
The LCD monitor becomes brighter and easier to see even when
taking pictures outdoors.
• The brightness of the pictures displayed on the LCD monitor is increased so some subjects
may appear differently from actuality on the LCD monitor. However, this does not affect the
recorded pictures.
• The LCD monitor automatically returns to normal brightness after 30 seconds when recording
in Power LCD mode. Press any button to make the LCD monitor bright again.
• If the screen is difficult to see because of light from the sun etc. shining on it, use your hand or
another object to block the light.
• The number of recordable pictures decreases in Auto power LCD and Power LCD modes.
• [AUTO POWER LCD] cannot be selected when playing back pictures.
• [AUTO POWER LCD] is disabled during motion picture recording.
Set the screen that is displayed when the mode dial is set to
,
,
,
and
.
[OFF]:
The recording screen in the currently selected
Advanced Scene Mode (P94) or Scene Mode (P98)
appears.
[AUTO]:
The Advanced Scene Mode or Scene Mode menu
screen appears.
} [SCENE MENU]
,
Set the focus confirmation beep, the self-timer beep and the
alarm beep.
[BEEP]
u [VOLUME]
[s] (Muted)
[t] (Low)
[u] (High)
Adjust the volume of the speaker to any of 7 levels.
• When you connect the camera to a TV, the volume of the TV speakers does not change.
VQT2A61
35
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 36 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
v [NO.RESET]
Reset the file number of the next recording to 0001.
• The folder number is updated and the file number starts from 0001. (P154)
• A folder number between 100 and 999 can be assigned.
When the folder number reaches 999, the number cannot be reset. We recommend formatting
the card (P38) after saving the data on a PC or elsewhere.
• To reset the folder number to 100, format the card first and then use this function to reset the
file number.
A reset screen for the folder number will then appear. Select [YES] to reset the folder number.
w [RESET]
The [REC] or [SETUP]/[CUSTOM MENU] menu settings are reset
to the initial settings.
• When the [REC] mode settings are reset, data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will be also
reset, too.
• When [SETUP]/[CUSTOM MENU] menu settings are reset, the following settings are also
reset. In addition, [FAVORITE] (P134) in [PLAYBACK] mode menu is set to [OFF], and
[ROTATE DISP.] (P141) is set to [ON].
– Film Mode (P87)
– The birthday and name settings for [BABY1]/[BABY2] (P99) and [PET] (P100) in Scene
Mode.
– The settings of [TRAVEL DATE] (P113) (departure date, return date, location)
– The [WORLD TIME] (P115) setting.
• The folder number and the clock setting are not changed.
Select the USB communication system after or before connecting
the camera to your PC or your printer with the USB connection
cable (supplied).
x [USB MODE]
y [SELECT ON CONNECTION]:
Select either [PC] or [PictBridge(PTP)] if you connected the
camera to a PC or a printer supporting PictBridge.
z [PC]:
Set after or before connecting to a PC.
{ [PictBridge(PTP)]:
Set after or before connecting to a printer supporting PictBridge.
• When [PC] is selected, the camera is connected via the “USB Mass Storage” communication
system.
• When [PictBridge(PTP)] is selected, the camera is connected via the “PTP (Picture Transfer
Protocol)” communication system.
Set to match the type of TV.
[TV ASPECT]
[W]:
When connecting to a 16:9 screen TV.
[X]:
When connecting to a 4:3 screen TV.
• This will work when the AV cable is connected.
36
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 37 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Set the format for the HDMI output when playing back on the
HDMI compatible high definition TV connected with this unit using
the HDMI mini cable (optional).
[HDMI MODE]
[AUTO]:
The output resolution is automatically set based on the
information from the connected TV.
[1080i]:
The interlace method with 1080 available scan lines is used for
output.
[720p]:
The progressive method with 720 available scan lines is used for
output.
[480p]:
The progressive method with 480 available scan lines is used for
output.
• Interlace method/progressive method
i= interlace scanning is scanning the screen with half of the effective scanning lines every 1/60
seconds, where p= progressive scanning is a high density image signal that is scanning the
screen with all the effective scanning lines every 1/60 seconds.
The [HDMI] terminal on this unit is compatible with high definition output [1080i]. It is necessary
to have a compatible TV to enjoy progressive and high definition images.
• If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], match with the image format
your TV can display, and select number of effective scanning lines. (Please read the operating
instructions for the TV.)
• This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected.
• Refer to P147 for details.
Setup so this unit can be controlled by the remote control of the
VIERA by automatically coupling this unit with the VIERA Link
compatible equipment using HDMI mini cable (optional).
[VIERA Link]
[OFF]:
Operation is performed with the buttons on this unit.
[ON]:
Remote control operation of the VIERA Link
compatible equipment is enabled. (Not all operations
are possible)
Button operation of the main unit will be limited.
• This will work when the HDMI mini cable (optional) is connected.
• Refer to P148 for details.
[VERSION DISP.]
This enables the firmware versions of the camera and lens to be
checked.
• [–. –] is displayed as the lens firmware when the lens is not mounted.
Set the language displayed on the screen.
~ [LANGUAGE]
[ENGLISH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ESPAÑOL]/[PORTUGUÊS]
• If you set a different language by mistake, select [~] from the menu icons to set the desired
language.
VQT2A61
37
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 38 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
[FORMAT]
The card is formatted.
Formatting permanently deletes all data on your memory
card. Please be sure all pictures and motion pictures are
saved elsewhere before using this feature.
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P25) when formatting. Do not
turn the camera off during formatting.
• If the card has been formatted on a PC or other equipment, format it on the camera again.
• If the card cannot be formatted, please try another card before contacting Panasonic or our
Service Center.
For USA and Puerto Rico assistance, please call:
1-800-211-PANA(7262) or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
38
VQT2A61
For Canadian assistance, please call:
1-800-99-LUMIX (1-800-995-8649) or
send e-mail to: lumixconcierge@ca.panasonic.com
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 39 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Holding and using your camera
• The [LVF/LCD AUTO] (P126) is set to [ON] initially. It will switch to viewfinder display and LCD
monitor will be turned off when there is a hand or object near the eye sensor.
Tips for taking good pictures
A AF assist lamp
• Do not cover the flash or the AF assist lamp with your fingers
or other objects.
• Hold the camera gently with both hands, keep your arms still at
your side and stand with your feet slightly apart.
• Be careful not to move the camera when you press the shutter button.
• Do not touch the front of the lens. (P168)
• When taking pictures, make sure your footing is stable and there is
no danger of colliding with another person, an object etc.
LCD Monitor
This is convenient as it allows you to take pictures from various angles by adjusting the
LCD monitor. (P14)
∫ Taking pictures at a normal angle
∫ Taking pictures at a high angle
Open the LCD monitor 180o toward you,
and adjust the angle.
∫ Taking pictures at a low angle
Open the LCD monitor 180o toward you,
and adjust the angle.
• This is convenient when there is someone in front • This is convenient when taking pictures of
of you and you cannot get close to the subject.
flowers etc. that are in a low position.
VQT2A61
39
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 40 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
∫ Taking pictures with the camera held vertically
Open the LCD monitor and rotate it to an angle that makes it easy to see.
• Do not cover the AF assist lamp (P11) with your fingers or other objects.
Taking pictures at a normal angle
Taking pictures at a high angle
Taking pictures at a low angle
Direction detection function
Pictures recorded with the camera held vertically are played back vertically (rotated). (Only
when [ROTATE DISP.] (P141) is set to [ON])
• The direction detection function may not operate correctly if recording is performed with the
camera aimed up or down.
• Motion pictures taken with the camera held vertically are not displayed vertically.
• You can only use the direction detection function when using a compatible lens. (P15)
(Refer to the catalogue, website etc. for compatible lenses.)
40
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 41 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Preparation
Switching the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
∫ About the eye sensor automatic switching
Eye sensor is active when the [LVF/LCD AUTO] (P126) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is
set to [ON], switching automatically to viewfinder display when an eye or object is moved
closer to the viewfinder, and to LCD monitor display when it is moved away.
A AF assist lamp
• When the LCD monitor turns on, the
Viewfinder turns off (and vice versa).
• Eye sensor might not work properly depending
on the shape of your eyeglasses, the way you
hold the camera, or bright light shining around
the eyepiece. Switch manually in that case.
• The eye sensor automatic switching works
when the sensor recognizes things that come
closer to it, therefore it is recommended that
[LVF/LCD AUTO] be set to [OFF] in [ECONOMY] (P33).
• The eye sensor is disabled during motion picture playback.
Press [LVF/LCD] to switch the
monitor screen.
• It is possible to switch between the LCD (LCD
monitor) and LVF (viewfinder) display
manually.
“LVF” is abbreviation of “Live View Finder” and
it represents the viewfinder display.
B
C
D
E
F
Viewfinder
Eye sensor
LCD monitor
[LVF/LCD] button
Eye cup
∫ Diopter adjustment
Adjust the diopter to suit your vision so that
you can see the Viewfinder clearly.
Look at the display on the Viewfinder and
rotate the diopter adjustment dial to
where the screen is clearest.
Note
• The eye cup cannot be removed. Please read
P167 for the cleaning and care.
P
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB 9
VQT2A61
41
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 42 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Mode switching
Basic
Selecting the [REC] mode, and record still picture
or motion picture
Turn the camera on.
• The status indicator 2 lights when you turn this unit
on 1.
• Make sure the drive mode lever is set to [
].
ON
OFF
Switching the mode by rotating the mode
dial.
Align a desired mode with part A.
• Rotate the mode dial slowly and surely to adjust
to each mode. (The mode dial rotates 360 o)
∫ Basic
Intelligent Auto Mode (P45)
The subjects are recorded using settings automatically selected by the camera.
Program AE Mode (P51)
The subjects are recorded using your own settings.
42
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 43 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
∫ Advanced
Aperture-priority AE Mode (P90)
The shutter speed is automatically determined by the aperture value you set.
Shutter-priority AE Mode (P90)
The aperture value is automatically determined by the shutter speed you set.
Manual Exposure Mode (P91)
The exposure is adjusted by the aperture value and the shutter speed which are
manually adjusted.
Creative Motion Picture Mode (P108)
Record motion picture with manual settings.
Custom Mode (P102)
Use this mode to take pictures with previously registered settings.
Scene Mode (P98)
This allows you to take pictures that match the scene being recorded.
My Color Mode (P100)
Easily check the color of light, brightness, and vividness of color when the picture is
taken.
∫ Advanced Scene Mode
Portrait mode (P95)
Use this mode to take pictures of people.
Scenery mode (P95)
Use this mode to take pictures of scenery.
Sports mode (P96)
Use this mode to take pictures of sporting events, etc.
Close-up mode (P96)
Use this mode to take pictures of a close-by subject.
Night portrait mode (P97)
Use this mode to take pictures of night scenes and people against night time scenery.
VQT2A61
43
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 44 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
A Shutter button
B Motion picture button
C [(] button
• Refer to P52 for [AFS] and [AFC].
Taking the still picture
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
Press the shutter button fully (push it in further), and take
the picture.
∫ For more details, refer to the explanation of each recording mode.
Recording the motion picture
Press the motion picture button to start the recording.
Press the motion picture button again to stop the recording.
∫ Recording of motion picture appropriate for each mode is possible.
For more details, refer to “Taking motion pictures using the automatic function”
(P48), “Recording Motion Picture” (P103).
Playback the recorded still pictures or motion picture
Press [(].
Press 2/1 to select the picture.
∫ For more details, refer to “Playing back Pictures” (P56), “Playing Back Motion
Pictures/Pictures with Audio” (P131).
44
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 45 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
[REC] mode: ñ
Taking pictures using the automatic function
(ñ: Intelligent Auto Mode)
The camera will set the most appropriate settings to match the subject and the recording
conditions so we recommend this mode for beginners or those who want to leave the
settings to the camera and take pictures easily.
• The following functions are activated automatically.
– Scene detection/[D.RED-EYE]/Face detection/Intelligent ISO sensitivity control/[I.EXPOSURE]/
[LONG SHTR NR]/[QUICK AF]/[FOCUS PRIORITY]/Backlight Compensation
Set the mode dial to [
].
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
• Refer to P52 for [AFS] and [AFC].
1
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The focus indication 1 (green) lights when the subject
is focused.
• The AF area 2 is displayed around the subject’s face
by the face detection function. In other cases, it is
displayed at the point on the subject which is in focus.
• The focus indication blinks when the subject is not
focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the
shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again.
• The focus range is different depending on used lens.
– When 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in
DMC-GH1K is used: 0.5 m (1.64 feet) to ¶
2
Press the shutter button fully (push it in
further), and take the picture.
• A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus.
• The access indication (P27) lights red when pictures
are being recorded on the card.
∫ When taking pictures using the flash (P65)
∫ When taking pictures using the zoom (P55)
∫ When taking pictures with Manual Focus (P80)
VQT2A61
45
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 46 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Scene detection
When the camera identifies the optimum scene, the icon of the scene concerned is
displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its color changes to the usual red.
¦ >
[i-PORTRAIT]
[i-SCENERY]
[i-CLOSE-UP]
[i-NIGHT PORTRAIT]
• Only when [‡] is selected
[i-NIGHT SCENERY]
• Only when [Œ] is selected
[i-BABY]¢
• [¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set.
• If a tripod is used, for instance, and the camera has judged that camera shake is minimal when
the Scene Mode has been identified as [ ], the shutter speed will be slower than normal. Take
care not to move the camera while taking pictures.
• An optimum scene for the specified subject will be chosen when set to AF tracking (P47).
• When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], and the face similar to the registered face is detected, [R]
is displayed in the top right of [ ], [ ] and [ ].
¢ When [FACE RECOG.] is set to [ON], [ ] will be displayed for birthdays of registered faces
already set only when the face of a person 3 years old or younger is detected.
∫ Face detection
When [ ],[ ] or [ ] is selected, the camera automatically
detects a person’s face, and it will adjust the focus and exposure.
(P78)
Note
• Due to conditions such as the ones below, a different scene may be
identified for the same subject.
– Subject conditions: When the face is bright or dark, The size of the subject, The distance to
the subject, The contrast of the subject, When the subject is moving
– Recording conditions: Sunset, Sunrise, Under low brightness conditions, When the camera is
shaken, When zoom is used
• To take pictures in an intended scene, it is recommended that you take pictures in the
appropriate recording mode.
∫ The Backlight Compensation
Backlight refers to when light comes from the back of a subject.
In this case, the subject will become dark, so this function compensates the backlight by
brightening the whole of the picture automatically.
Backlight compensation is automatically applied in Intelligent Auto Mode.
46
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 47 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Face Recognition
Face of the person that is taken often can be registered along with
information such as name and birthday.
When a picture is taken with [FACE RECOG.] turned [ON], it will
search for the face similar to the registered face, setting the focus
and exposure preferentially.
It is also possible, during face recognition, to make the camera
remember people’s faces, to detect faces that have been taken
more often than others, and to display the face recognition registration screen of that face.
(P110)
Note
• [FACE RECOG.] will find a face similar to the registered face, and does not guarantee secure
recognition of a person.
• Faces with similar distinctive features such as those of parents and children or siblings may not
be correctly recognized.
• Face Recognition may take more time to select and recognize distinctive facial features than
regular face detection.
AF Tracking Function
It is possible to set the focus and exposure to the specified subject. Focus and exposure
will keep following the subject automatically even if it moves.
1
Press 2.
• [
] is displayed in the lower left of the screen.
• AF Tracking frame is displayed in the center of the
screen.
• Press 2 again to cancel.
2
Place the subject in the Tracking frame, and
press the shutter button halfway to lock the subject.
• AF area will turn green when the camera detects the subject.
• AF tracking frame will turn yellow when you release the shutter button and
the optimum scene for the locked subject will be identified.
• Press 2 to cancel.
Note
• [FACE RECOG.] does not work during AF tracking.
• Please read the Note regarding the AF tracking on P78.
Compensating the Exposure
You can compensate the exposure.
Refer to P71 for details.
1 Press the front dial to switch to Exposure
Compensation operation.
2 Rotate the front dial.
• The Exposure Compensation value appears on the
lower portion of the screen.
• Select [0] to return to the original exposure.
VQT2A61
47
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 48 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
About the flash
• Open the flash when the flash is to be used. (P65)
•[
], [
], or [
] will appear depending on the type and brightness of the subject.
• Flash is activated twice. Especially with [
] or [
], digital red-eye reduction (P66) is
executed, and the time until the second flash is longer, so subject should not move until the
second flash is activated.
• Flash modes cannot be switched using the menu in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
Taking motion pictures using the automatic function
It is possible to take motion pictures matching the subjects and conditions with Intelligent
Auto Mode.
1
2
3
Perform steps 1 and 2 on page 45.
Start recording by pressing the motion picture
button.
Stop the recording by pressing the motion
picture button again.
• Refer to P103 for details about recording motion pictures.
∫ Scene detection
When the camera identifies the optimum scene in recording motion pictures, the icon of
the scene concerned is displayed in blue for 2 seconds, after which its color changes to
the usual red.
¦ >
[i-PORTRAIT]
[i-SCENERY]
[i-LOW LIGHT]
[i-CLOSE-UP]
• [¦] is set if none of the scenes are applicable, and the standard settings are set.
∫ Face detection
When [ ] is selected, the camera automatically detects a person’s face, and it will adjust
the focus and exposure (P78).
∫ The Backlight Compensation
Backlight refers to when light comes from the back of a subject.
In this case, the subject will become dark, so this function compensates the backlight by
brightening the whole of the picture automatically.
Backlight Compensation will work automatically when a face is recognized with the [ ].
Note
• Due to conditions, a different scene may be identified for the same subject. Please read the
Note regarding the Scene detection (P46) for details.
• Functions enabled for motion picture recording are different to those enabled for still picture
recording.
48
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 49 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Settings in Intelligent Auto Mode
• Only the following functions can be set in this mode.
[REC] mode menu
– [ASPECT RATIO] (P116)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P117)/[QUALITY] (P118)/[FACE RECOG.]
(P118)/[STABILIZER]¢1 (P119)
¢1 Only [MODE1] or [MODE2] can be set.
[MOTION PICTURE] mode menu
– [REC MODE] (P105)/[REC QUALITY]¢2 (P105)/[WIND CUT] (P107)
¢2 [
] for [MOTION JPEG] cannot be set.
[CUSTOM MENU] menu
– [CUST. SET MEM.] (P102)/[LCD INFO.DISP.] (P126)/[GUIDE LINE] (P126)/
[REMAINING DISP.] (P129)
[SETUP] menu
– [CLOCK SET]/[WORLD TIME]/[BEEP]/[LANGUAGE]
• Only [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] (
) in Film Mode (P87) can be selected.
• In recording still pictures, the settings of the following items are fixed.
Item
Settings
[ECONOMY]
([POWER SAVE]) (P33)
[5MIN.]
Flash (P65)
‡/Œ
[FLASH SYNCHRO] (P70) [1ST]
[BURST RATE] (P72)
[H] (High speed)
[AUTO BRACKET] (P74)
[STEP]: [3•1/3]
[SEQUENCE]: [0/`/_]
[SELF-TIMER] (P76)
[AF MODE] (P77)
š (Set to [
[WHITE BALANCE] (P83)
[AWB]
[SENSITIVITY] (P86)
(Intelligent ISO)
(The maximum ISO sensitivity: ISO800)
[METERING MODE]
(P119)
C
[D.RED-EYE] (P120)
[ON]
[I.EXPOSURE] (P121)
[STANDARD]
[COLOR SPACE] (P122)
[sRGB]
[LONG SHTR NR] (P123)
[ON]
] when a face cannot be detected)
[PRE AF] (P127)
[FOCUS PRIORITY]
(P128)
[ON]
[AF ASSIST LAMP] (P128) [ON]
VQT2A61
49
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 50 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
• In recording motion pictures, the settings of the following items are fixed.
Item
Settings
[AF MODE] (P77)
š (This mode is set to Multi auto focus mode for motion
pictures when a face cannot be detected.)
[WHITE BALANCE] (P83)
[AWB]
[SENSITIVITY] (P86)
[AUTO] (The maximum ISO sensitivity: ISO1600)
[METERING MODE]
(P119)
C
[STABILIZER] (P119)
[MODE1]
[I.EXPOSURE] (P121)
[STANDARD]
• The following functions cannot be used.
– [AUTO LCD OFF] of [ECONOMY]/[HIGHLIGHT]/AF/AE lock/White balance fine adjustment/
White Balance Bracket/Multi Film Bracket/Flash output adjustment/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/
[DIGITAL ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[AUDIO REC.]/[AF/AE LOCK]/[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]/
[DIRECT AF AREA]/[SHOOT W/O LENS]
• During motion picture recording, the functions disabled in other recording modes are also
disabled. For details, refer to the explanations for each mode.
• The other items on the [SETUP] menu and [CUSTOM MENU] menu can be set in a mode such
as the Program AE Mode. What is set will be reflected in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
50
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 51 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
[REC] mode: ³
Taking pictures with your favorite settings
(
: Program AE Mode)
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and the aperture value according to the
brightness of the subject.
You can take pictures with greater freedom by changing various settings in [REC] menu.
• Set the drive mode lever to [
].
Set the mode dial to [
].
• To change the setting while taking pictures, refer to
“Using the [REC] Mode Menu” (P116) or “Using
the [CUSTOM MENU]” (P125).
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or
[AFC].
• Refer to P52 for [AFS] and [AFC].
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The focus indication (green) lights when the subject is
focused.
• The focus indication blinks when the subject is not
focused. In this case, a picture is not taken. Press the
shutter button halfway to focus on the subject again.
• The focus range is different depending on used lens.
– When 14 –140 mm/F4.0 –5.8 lens included in
DMC-GH1K is used: 0.5 m (1.64 feet) to ¶
• If the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100] and the aperture value is set to F4.0 (when
14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is attached), the shutter speed is
automatically set between about 30 seconds and 1/4000th of a second.
Press the halfway pressed shutter button
fully to take a picture.
• A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into focus.
• If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a picture even when the subject is
not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P128)
• The access indication lights (P27) red when pictures are being recorded on the card.
∫ To adjust the exposure and take pictures at times when the image appears too
dark (P71)
∫ To adjust the colors and take pictures at times when the image appears too red
(P83)
∫ When recording motion pictures (P103)
VQT2A61
51
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 52 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Fix the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway (AFS)
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS].
• “AFS” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Single”. The focus is
adjusted when you press the shutter button halfway.
• Normally use the [AFS].
• Focus during the burst is fixed at the first picture. Refer to
P72 for details.
• When recording motion pictures, the focus is continuously
adjusted for both [AFS] and [AFC].
Continuously focusing on a subject (AFC)
This mode allows you to compose a picture more easily by continuously focusing on the
movement of the subject while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
When taking pictures of a moving subject, the camera predicts the movement of the
subject and focuses on it. (motion prediction)
Set the focus mode dial to [AFC].
• “AFC” is an abbreviation of “Auto Focus Continuous”. The
camera is continuously focusing on the subject while the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
• It may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom
ring from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a
distant one to a nearby one.
• Focusing will continue even after the shutter button is
pressed during the burst. Refer to P72 for details.
• Set the [PRE AF] of [CUSTOM MENU] menu item (P127) when you would like to set focus
before pressing the shutter button halfway.
• Focus sound will not go off in [AFC] even if the subject comes into focus. Also, AF area will not
be displayed if the AF mode is set to [ ].
• When brightness is not enough, the mode will turn to [AFS] and in that case the AF area will be
displayed and the focus sound will beep when the subject comes into focus.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
Take a picture with Manual Focus (MF)
Set the focus mode dial to [MF].
• For details, refer to P80.
52
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 53 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Focusing
Align the subject to the screen, and then press the shutter button halfway.
A
B
C
DE
A
B
C
D
E
F
¢
Focus
When the subject is When the subject
focused
is not focused
Focus indication
On
AF area
Green
Blinks
—
Sound
Beeps 2 times
—
F
Focus indication
AF area (normal)
AF area (when using the digital zoom or when it is dark)
Aperture value¢
Shutter speed¢
ISO sensitivity
It will flash in red when appropriate exposure is not achieved.
(Except when flash is activated)
• When the AF mode is set to [ ], and multiple AF areas (up to 23 areas) have turned on, all the
AF areas that have turned on are focused. If you would like to take a picture focused on a
certain area, switch the AF mode to [Ø]. (P77)
• Focus sound will not beep if the focus mode is set to [AFC]. Also, the AF area will not be
displayed if the AF mode is set to [ ].
When the subject is not in focus
If the subject is not in the center of composition when the AF mode is set to [Ø], it is
possible to move the AF area. (P79)
∫ Take picture with different focus modes depending on the subject (P77)
∫ Subjects and recording conditions which are difficult to focus
• Fast-moving subjects, extremely bright subjects or subjects without contrast
• When recording subjects through windows or near shiny objects
• When it is dark or when jitter occurs
• When the camera is too close to the subject or when taking a picture of both distant and near
subjects
Preventing jitter (camera shake)
When the jitter alert [
] appears, use [STABILIZER] (P119), a tripod, the self-timer
(P76) or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) (P161).
• Shutter speed will be slower particularly in the following cases. Keep the camera still from the
moment the shutter button is pressed until the picture appears on the screen. We recommend
using a tripod.
– Slow sync.
– Slow sync./Red-eye reduction
– [NIGHT PORTRAIT] and [NIGHT SCENERY] in the Advanced Scene Mode (P94)
– In [PARTY] in Scene Mode (P98)
– When you set to a slow shutter speed
VQT2A61
53
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 54 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Program Shift
In Program AE Mode, you can change the preset aperture
value and shutter speed without changing the exposure.
This is called Program Shift.
You can make the background more blurred by
decreasing the aperture value or record a moving subject
more dynamically by slowing the shutter speed when
taking a picture in Program AE Mode.
1
2
A
Press the shutter button halfway and display the aperture value and shutter
speed value on the screen.
While the values are displayed (about 10 seconds), perform the Program Shift
by rotating the front dial.
• It will switch between Program Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation (P71)
every time the front dial is pressed while the values are displayed.
• The Program Shift indication A appears on the screen when Program Shift is activated.
• To cancel Program Shift, turn the camera off or rotate the front dial until the Program Shift
indication disappears.
∫ Example of Program Shift
(When 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 –5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used)
(A): Aperture value
(B): Shutter speed
1 Program Shift amount
2 Program Shift line chart
3 Program Shift limit
1
(A)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14 (Ev)
2
15
2.8
16
4
17
5.6
18
8
19
11
20
16
22
4
2
1
1/2
1/4
1/8
1/15
1/30
1/60 1/125 1/250 1/500 1/1000 1/2000 1/4000
(B)
Note
• How the Exposure Compensation is switched can be changed by [EXPO. SETTINGS] (P129)
in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
• If the exposure is not adequate when the shutter button is pressed halfway, the aperture value
and shutter speed turn red and blink.
• Program Shift is canceled and the camera returns to normal Program AE Mode if more than
10 seconds pass after Program Shift is activated. However, the Program Shift setting is
memorized.
• Depending on the brightness of the subject, Program Shift may not be activated.
• Program Shift is not possible when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [
].
54
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 55 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures with the Zoom
Using the Optical Zoom/Using the Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)/
Using the Digital Zoom
You can zoom-in to make people and objects appear closer or zoom-out to record
landscapes in wide angle.
To make subjects appear closer use (Tele)
Rotate the zoom ring towards Tele. (P13)
To make subjects appear further away use (Wide)
Rotate the zoom ring towards Wide. (P13)
To enlarge further, set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] in the [REC] mode menu to [ON], or set the
[DIGITAL ZOOM] to [2k] or [4k] for further enlargement.
When the [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (max. 2 times) is used, set the aspect ratio (X/Y/W/ )
to numbers of recordable pixels other than [L].
∫ Types of zooms
(When 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used)
Feature
Optical zoom
Focus range/ 14 mm to 140 mm
Maximum
(28 mm to
magnification
280 mm)¢1
Picture
quality
Conditions
No deterioration
None
Extended Optical Zoom (EZ)
Digital zoom
2k¢2
40k [including optical zoom 10k]
80k [including Extended
Optical Zoom 2k]
(54 mm to 546 mm)¢1
No deterioration
The higher the magnification
level, the greater the
deterioration.
Set the [EX. OPT. ZOOM]
in [REC] mode menu
[DIGITAL ZOOM] (P121) on
(P121) to [ON], and then
the [REC] mode menu is set to
select number of
[2k] or [4k].
recordable pixels with
[
] (P117)
¢1 This is the equivalent value for a 35 mm film camera.
¢2 The magnification level differs depending on [PICTURE SIZE] and [ASPECT RATIO] setting.
∫ Extended Optical Zoom mechanism
Example: When it is set to [
] (equal to 3.1 million pixels), it will take the picture using
the 3.1 million pixels in the center out of the 12 million pixels of the imaging device,
resulting to be more of a telephoto picture.
Note
• “EZ” is an abbreviation of “Extended optical Zoom”.
• If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again.
• When using the digital zoom, [STABILIZER] may not be effective.
• When using the digital zoom, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P76) for taking
pictures.
VQT2A61
55
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 56 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
• The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the digital zoom.
• The Extended Optical Zoom cannot be used in the following cases.
– In Intelligent Auto Mode
– In Creative Motion Picture Mode
– When recording motion pictures
– When [QUALITY] is set to [
], [
] or [
]
• [DIGITAL ZOOM] cannot be used in the following cases.
– In Intelligent Auto Mode
– In Advanced Scene Mode
– In Scene Mode
] is set
– When [
– When [QUALITY] is set to [
], [
] or [
]
Playing back Pictures
Press [(].
A [(] button
Press 2/1 to select the picture.
2: Play back the previous picture
1: Play back the next picture
• Speed of picture forwarding/rewinding changes
depending on the playback status.
• If you press and hold 2/1, you can play back the pictures in succession.
∫ To finish playback
Press [(] again, press the motion picture button or press the shutter button
halfway.
Note
• This camera complies with the DCF standard “Design rule for Camera File system” established
by JEITA “Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association” and with Exif
“Exchangeable Image File Format”. Files which do not comply with the DCF standard cannot
be played back.
56
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 57 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Changing the Information Displayed on the playback screen
Press [DISPLAY] to switch the monitor screen.
A [DISPLAY] button
• When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not
activated. During playback zoom (P58), while playing back
motion pictures (P131) and during a slide show (P132), you
can only select “Normal display B” or “No display F”.
• Refer to P64 for information about the histogram D.
30
F4.0
STD
1/9
0
WB
ISO
AWB
100
AFS
P STANDARD
P F4.0 30
B
C
D
E
F
¢
0
100
AWB
AWB
10:00 DEC. 1.2009
s
RGB
100-0001
F4.0
0
30
ISO100
1/9
100-0001
Normal display
Detailed information display
Histogram display
Highlight display¢
No display
This is displayed if [HIGHLIGHT] (P34) in the [SETUP] menu is set to [ON].
Displaying Multiple Screens (Multi Playback)
Rotate the front dial left.
A
1 screen>12 screens>30 screens>Calendar screen
display
A Number of the selected picture and the total number of
recorded pictures
• Rotate the front dial right to return to the previous screen.
• Pictures are not rotated for display.
∫ To return to normal playback
1 Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture.
2
• An icon will be displayed depending on the recorded picture and the settings.
Press [MENU/SET] or the front dial.
• The picture that was selected will appear.
VQT2A61
57
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 58 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
Displaying Pictures by Recording Date (Calendar Playback)
You can display pictures by recording date.
Rotate the front dial left to display the
calendar screen.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the date to be played back.
3/4: Select the month
2/1: Select the date
• If there were no pictures recorded during a month, the month is not displayed.
MENU
/SET
Press [MENU/SET] or the front dial to
display the pictures that were recorded on
the selected date.
or
• Rotate the front dial left to return to the calendar
screen display.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select a picture and then press [MENU/SET] or
the front dial.
• The picture that was selected will appear.
Note
• The recording date of the picture selected in the playback screen becomes the date selected
when the calendar screen is first displayed.
• If there are multiple pictures with the same recording date, the first picture recorded on that day
is displayed.
• You can display the calendar between January 2000 and December 2099.
• If the date is not set in the camera, the recording date is set as January 1st, 2009.
• If you take pictures after setting the travel destination in [WORLD TIME], the pictures are
displayed by the dates at the travel destination in calendar playback.
Using the Playback Zoom
Rotate the front dial right.
1k>2k>4k>8k>16k
• When you rotate the front dial left after enlarging the picture,
the magnification becomes lower.
• When you change the magnification, the zoom position
indication A appears for about 1 second, and the position of
the enlarged section can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• The more a picture is enlarged, the more its quality
deteriorates.
• When you move the position to be displayed, the zoom
position indication appears for about 1 second.
58
VQT2A61
A
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 59 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
∫ Switching the displayed image while maintaining the playback zoom
You can switch the displayed image while maintaining the same zoom magnification and
zoom position for the playback zoom.
Switch to picture select operation by pressing
the front dial during playback zoom, and select
pictures with 2/1.
• It will switch between picture select operation and move
zoom position operation every time the front dial is pressed
during playback zoom.
Note
• You can also delete the recording information etc. on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder during
playback zoom by pressing [DISPLAY].
• If you want to save the enlarged picture, use the trimming function. (P139)
• The playback zoom may not operate if pictures have been recorded with other equipment.
• The zoom magnification and the zoom position are canceled when the camera is turned off
(including power save mode).
• The zoom position returns to the center in the following images.
– Images with different aspect ratios
– Images with different numbers of recorded pixels
– Images with a different rotation direction (when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON])
• Playback zoom cannot be used during motion picture playback or pictures with audio playback.
Deleting Pictures
Once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
Press [(].
To delete a single picture
Select the picture to be deleted, and then
press [‚].
A [(] button
B [DISPLAY] button
C [‚] button
Press 2 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
MENU
/SET
VQT2A61
59
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 60 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Basic
To delete multiple pictures (up to 50) or all the pictures
Press [‚].
Press 3/4 to select [DELETE MULTI] or [DELETE ALL] and then
press [MENU/SET].
• [DELETE ALL] > step 5.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture,
and then press [DISPLAY] to set.
(Repeat this step.)
• [‚] appears on the selected pictures. If [DISPLAY]
is pressed again, the setting is canceled.
DISPLAY
Press [MENU/SET].
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET] to set.
∫ When [DELETE ALL] has been selected with the [FAVORITE] (P134) setting
The selection screen is displayed again. Select [DELETE ALL] or
[ ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ], press 3 to select [YES] and delete the pictures.
([ALL DELETE EXCEPT Ü] cannot be selected if no pictures have been set as
[FAVORITE].)
Note
• Do not turn the camera off while deleting (while [‚] is displayed). Use a battery with a sufficient
power or the AC adaptor (P25).
• If you press [MENU/SET] while deleting pictures using [DELETE MULTI], [DELETE ALL] or
[ALL DELETE EXCEPT Ü], the deleting will stop halfway.
• Depending on the number of pictures to be deleted, it may take some time to delete them.
• If pictures do not conform to the DCF standard or are protected (P143), they will not be deleted
even if [DELETE ALL] or [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] is selected.
60
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 61 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Switching the display of the LCD Monitor/
Viewfinder
Switching the displayed information
Press [DISPLAY] to change.
A [DISPLAY] button
• When the menu screen appears, the [DISPLAY] button is not
activated.
LCD monitor display
With the [LCD DISP.STYLE] (P126) of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu, you can choose the
displayed screen on the LCD monitor to display in [
] (LCD monitor style) or [
]
(viewfinder style).
When [
] is set
9
P
STD
WB
ISO
AWB
AUTO
AF
0
−1
−2
B
C
D
E
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
3
STANDARD
9
Normal display¢1, 2
No display¢1
[LCD INFO.DISP.]¢3
Turned off
When [
] is set
9
P
STD
WB
ISO
AWB
AUTO
AF
0
−1
−2
−3
P
F
G
H
I
2
0
−3
P
1
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
AWB
9
P
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
AWB
9
1
0
2
3
STANDARD
Normal displayidetailed information¢1, 2
Normal display¢1
[LCD INFO.DISP.]¢3
Turned off
VQT2A61
61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 62 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Viewfinder display
With the [LVF DISP.STYLE] (P126) of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu, you can choose the
displayed screen on the viewfinder to display in [
] (viewfinder style) or [
] (LCD
monitor style).
When [
] is set
A Normal display¢1
B Normal displayidetailed information¢1, 2
STD
P
When [
−3
0
+3
9 9
AUTO AWB
P
−3
0
+3
9 9
AUTO AWB
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB 9
] is set
C No display¢1
D Detailed information¢1, 2
STD
P
¢1 Guide lines are displayed when the [GUIDE LINE] of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to
anything except [OFF].
It is possible to move the position of the guide line using the Quick Menu when it is set to
[
]. (P63)
¢2 Histograms are displayed when the [HISTOGRAM] of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to
[ON].
It is possible to move the position of the histogram using the Quick Menu. (P64)
¢3 It is displayed when the [LCD INFO.DISP.] of the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to anything
except [OFF]. Color of the screen can be selected from 3 colors of brown, red or black.
(P126)
Note
• In [NIGHT PORTRAIT] (P97), the guide line is gray.
62
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 63 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ Recording guide line
When you align the subject on the horizontal and vertical guide lines or the cross point of
these lines, you can take pictures with well-designed composition by viewing the size, the
slope and the balance of the subject.
A [
]:
This is used when dividing the entire screen into 3k3 for taking pictures with a
well-balanced composition.
B [
]:
This is used when you want to position the subject at the exact center of the screen.
C [
]:
Position of the guide line can be set. It is used to take well balanced pictures of
subjects off the center of the image.
∫ Set the position of the guide line with [
]
• Set the [GUIDE LINE] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [
1
2
]. (P126)
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P32)
Press 2/1 to select guide line, and then press
[MENU/SET].
• You can also use the front dial to set.
• Selected item will be displayed in orange in the Quick Menu
screen, and the guide line itself will be displayed in orange when
the guide line is selected.
3
4
5
Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position.
• The guide line returns to the center when [‚] is pressed.
Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting.
Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick
Menu.
• Position of the guide line can be set from the [CUSTOM MENU]
menu too.
VQT2A61
63
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 64 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ About the Histogram
A histogram is a graph that displays brightness along the horizontal axis (black to white)
and the number of pixels at each brightness level on the vertical axis.
It allows you to easily check a picture’s exposure.
Examples of histogram
1 Properly Exposed
2 Under Exposed
3 Overexposed
STD
STD
STD
¢ Histogram
P 4.0 100 −3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
9
P 4.0 200
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
9
P 4.0 50
−3
0
+3
AUTO AWB
9
∫ Set the position of the histogram
• Set the [HISTOGRAM] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON]. (P126)
1
2
Press [Q.MENU] to display the Quick Menu. (P32)
Press 2/1 to select histogram, and then press
[MENU/SET].
• You can also use the front dial to set.
• Selected item will be displayed in orange in the Quick Menu
screen, and the frame of the histogram will be displayed in
orange when the histogram is selected.
3
4
5
Press 3/4/2/1 to set the position.
Press [MENU/SET] to finish the setting.
Press [Q.MENU] to close the Quick Menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the Quick
Menu.
• Position of the histogram can be set from the [CUSTOM MENU]
menu too.
Note
• When the recorded picture and the histogram do not match each other under the
following conditions, the histogram is displayed in orange.
– When the manual exposure assistance is other than [n0EV] during Exposure Compensation
or in the Manual Exposure Mode
– When the flash is activated
– When the flash is closed
• When the brightness of the screen is not correctly displayed in dark places
• When the exposure is not adequately adjusted
• The histogram is an approximation in recording mode.
• The histogram displayed in this camera does not match histograms displayed by picture editing
software used in PCs etc.
• Histogram is displayed in R (red), G (green), B (blue), and Y (luminance) during the playback.
64
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 65 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures using the Built-in Flash
A To open the flash
Slide the flash open lever.
B To close the flash
Press the flash until it clicks.
• Be sure to close the flash when not in use.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ] while the flash is
closed.
Switching to the appropriate flash setting
Applicable modes:
Set the built-in flash to match the recording.
• Open the flash.
Select [FLASH] in the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select a mode and press
[MENU/SET].
• For information about flash settings that can be selected, refer
to “Available flash settings by recording mode”. (P66)
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Item
‡: AUTO
Description of settings
The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make it necessary.
The flash is automatically activated when the recording conditions make it necessary.
It is activated once before the actual recording to reduce the red-eye
(
):
phenomenon (eyes of the subject appearing red in the picture) and then
AUTO/Red-eye
activated again for the actual recording.
reduction
• Use this when you take pictures of people in low lighting
conditions.
The
flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.
‰: Forced flash ON
• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light.
(
):
The flash is activated every time regardless of the recording conditions.
Forced ON/Red-eye Simultaneously it reduces the red-eye phenomenon.
• Use this when your subject is back-lit or under fluorescent light.
reduction
: Slow sync.
When taking pictures against a dark background landscape, this feature
will slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated. Dark background
landscape will appear brighter.
• Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark
background.
• Using a slower speed can cause motion blur. Using a tripod can
enhance your photos.
VQT2A61
65
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 66 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
If you take a picture with a dark background landscape, this feature will
slow the shutter speed when the flash is activated so that the dark
(
):
background landscape will become bright. Simultaneously it reduces the
Slow sync./Red-eye
red-eye phenomenon.
reduction
• Use this when you take pictures of people in front of a dark
background.
The flash is not activated in any recording conditions.
Œ: Forced flash OFF • Use this when you take pictures in places where the use of the
flash is not permitted.
¢ The flash is activated twice. The interval between the first and second flash is longer
when [
], [
] or [
] is set. The subject should not move until the second
flash is activated. Flash interval depends on the brightness of the subject.
∫ About the digital red-eye correction
When the flash is used with the Red-eye reduction ([
], [
automatically detect and correct the red-eye in the image data.
], [
]) selected, it will
• It may not be able to correct the red-eye depending on the recording conditions. It may also
correct objects other than red-eye.
• It can be set to [OFF] ([
], [
], [
]) with the [D.RED-EYE] in the [REC] mode menu (P120).
• It will be fixed to [ON] in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
∫ Available flash settings by recording mode
The available flash settings depend on the recording mode.
(±: Available, —: Not available, ¥: Initial setting of Advanced Scene Mode and Scene Mode)
‡
Œ
‡
ñ
±¢
—
—
—
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
³
±
´
²
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
±
±
±
±
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
±
±
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
±
¥
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
¥
±
±
¥
±
—
—
—
±
. —
/ —
—
—
—
—
—
¥
¥
±
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
¥
±
¥
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
¥
±
¥
±
—
—
±
±
—
—
—
—
¥
, —
—
—
—
—
—
¥
—
—
±
—
¥
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
¥
¥
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
¥
¥
±
—
—
—
±
—
—
—
—
—
—
¥
ï
2 —
: ±
; ±
í ¥
—
—
±
—
—
—
±
¥
—
±
—
—
—
±
*
+
-
‰
¢ When [‡] is selected, [
brightness.
66
VQT2A61
], [
] or [
1
—
‰
Œ
] is set depending on the type of subject and
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 67 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• The flash setting may change if the recording mode is changed. Set the flash setting again if
necessary.
• The flash setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off. However, the Advanced Scene
Mode or the Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting if the Advanced Scene Mode
or the Scene Mode is changed and then used.
• Available flash settings are those that were set for still picture recording.
• Flash will not be activated when recording motion picture.
∫ The available flash range to take pictures
(When 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used)
• The available flash range is an approximation.
When the aspect ratio is [X] or [
ISO sensitivity
].
Available flash range according to focal length of lens
Wide to 21 mm
22 mm
Tele
AUTO
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
4.8 m (15.8 feet)¢
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)¢
ISO100
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
2.4 m (7.87 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
1.8 m (5.91 feet)
ISO200
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
3.4 m (11.2 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
2.6 m (8.53 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
4.8 m (15.8 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)
ISO800
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
6.9 m (22.6 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
5.3 m (17.4 feet)
ISO1600
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
9.7 m (31.8 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
7.5 m (24.6 feet)
ISO3200
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
13.8 m (45.3 feet)
60 cm (1.97 feet) to
10.7 m (35.1 feet)
ISO400
Vignetting effect occurs
due to the light of the
flash.
When the aspect ratio is [Y].
ISO sensitivity
Available flash range according to focal length of lens
Wide to 17 mm
18 mm
Tele
AUTO
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
5.1 m (16.7 feet)¢
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)¢
ISO100
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
2.5 m (8.20 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
1.8 m (5.91 feet)
ISO200
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
3.6 m (11.8 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
2.6 m (8.53 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
5.1 m (16.7 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)
ISO800
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
7.2 m (23.6 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
5.3 m (17.4 feet)
ISO1600
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
10.2 m (33.5 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
7.5 m (24.6 feet)
ISO3200
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
14.4 m (47.2 feet)
60 cm (1.97 feet) to
10.7 m (35.1 feet)
ISO400
Vignetting effect occurs
due to the light of the
flash.
VQT2A61
67
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 68 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
When the aspect ratio is [W].
ISO sensitivity
Available flash range according to focal length of lens
Wide
15 mm
Tele
AUTO
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
5.5 m (18.0 feet)¢
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
5.3 m (17.4 feet)¢
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)¢
ISO100
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
2.7 m (8.85 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
2.6 m (8.53 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
1.8 m (5.91 feet)
ISO200
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
3.8 m (12.5 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
2.6 m (8.53 feet)
ISO400
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
5.5 m (18.0 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
5.3 m (17.4 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
3.7 m (12.1 feet)
ISO800
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
7.7 m (25.3 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
7.5 m (24.6 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
5.3 m (17.4 feet)
ISO1600
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
11.0 m (36.1 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
10.7 m (35.1 feet)
50 cm (1.64 feet) to
7.5 m (24.6 feet)
ISO3200
2.5 m (8.20 feet) to
15.5 m (50.9 feet)
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to
15.1 m (49.5 feet)
60 cm (1.97 feet) to
10.7 m (35.1 feet)
¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] (P123) is set to [OFF]
• At the time of flash photography, when distance with the subject is near, the flash light is
interrupted with lens and a part of picture being taken becomes dark. Check the distance
between the camera and the subject when taking a picture. The distance with subject from
which the flash light is interrupted differs according to the lens used.
– When 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is attached:
When the aspect ratio is [X] or [ ].
Vignetting effect occurs due to the light of the flash. (Wide to 21 mm)/
1.0 m (3.28 feet) or less (22 mm)/50 cm (1.64 feet) or less (Tele)
When the aspect ratio is [Y].
Vignetting effect occurs due to the light of the flash. (Wide to 17 mm)/
1.0 m (3.28 feet) or less (18 mm)/50 cm (1.64 feet) or less (Tele)
When the aspect ratio is [W].
2.5 m (8.20 feet) or less (Wide)/1.0 m (3.28 feet) or less (15 mm)/50 cm (1.64 feet) or
less (Tele)
∫ Shutter speed for each flash setting
Flash setting
Shutter speed (Sec.)
‡
1/30¢1 to 1/4000th
‰
1/30¢2 to 1/160th
Flash setting
Shutter speed (Sec.)
1 to 1/4000th
Œ
60¢3 to 1/4000th
¢1 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-priority AE Mode
¢2 This becomes 60 seconds in Shutter-priority AE Mode and B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure
Mode.
¢3 This becomes B (Bulb) in the Manual Exposure Mode.
• When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second.
• In Intelligent Auto Mode, shutter speed changes depending on the identified scene.
68
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 69 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• Do not bring the flash too close to objects or close the flash while it is activated. The
objects may be discolored by its heat or lighting.
• Do not close the flash soon after the flash is activated prior to taking pictures due to AUTO/
Red-eye reduction etc. It causes a malfunction.
• When you take a picture beyond the available flash range, the exposure may not be adjusted
properly and the picture may become bright or dark.
• When the flash is being charged, the flash icon blinks red, and you cannot take a picture even
when you press the shutter button fully.
• The white balance may not be properly adjusted if the flash level is insufficient for the subject.
• When taking a picture with the flash, we recommend removing the lens hood. In some
cases it may not allow the scene to be illuminated properly.
• It may take time to charge the flash if you repeat taking a picture. Take a picture after the
access indication disappears.
• The red-eye reduction effect differs between people. Also, if the subject was far away from the
camera or was not looking at the first flash, the effect may not be evident.
• When you attach an external flash, it takes priority over the built-in flash. Refer to P159 for the
external flash.
Adjust the flash output
Applicable modes:
Adjust the flash output when the subject is small, or the reflectivity is very high or low.
Select [FLASH ADJUST.] in the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
Press 2/1 to set the flash output and then press
[MENU/SET].
• You can adjust from [j2 EV] to [i2 EV] in steps of [1/3 EV].
• Select [0 EV] to return to the original flash output.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Note
• [i] or [j] is displayed on the flash icon in the LCD monitor/viewfinder when the flash level is
adjusted.
• The flash output setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.
VQT2A61
69
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 70 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Setting to the 2nd Curtain Synchro
Applicable modes:
2nd curtain synchro activates the flash just before the shutter closes when taking pictures
of moving objects such as cars using a slow shutter speed.
Select [FLASH SYNCHRO] in the [REC] mode
menu. (P30)
Press 4 to select [2ND] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Item
Effect
The normal method when taking
pictures with the flash.
1st curtain synchro
The light source appears behind the
subject and picture becomes
2nd curtain synchro dynamic.
Note
• Set it to [1ST] normally.
• [2nd] is displayed in the flash icon on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder if you set
[FLASH SYNCHRO] to [2ND].
• The flash sync. settings are also effective when using an external flash. (P159)
• When a fast shutter speed is set, the effect of [FLASH SYNCHRO] may deteriorate.
• You cannot set [
], [
] or [
] when [FLASH SYNCHRO] is set to [2ND].
70
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 71 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Compensating the Exposure
Use this function when you cannot achieve appropriate exposure due to the difference in
brightness between the subject and the background. Look at the following examples.
Under exposed
Properly
exposed
Compensate the exposure
towards positive.
Overexposed
Compensate the exposure
towards negative.
Press the front dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation.
Rotate the front dial to compensate the
exposure.
A Exposure Compensation value
• Select [0] to return to the original exposure.
A
Take a picture.
Note
• EV is an abbreviation of [Exposure Value]. It refers to the amount of light given to the CCD by
the aperture value and the shutter speed.
• The set exposure value is memorized even if the camera is turned off. However, the exposure
value during the Intelligent Auto Mode is not memorized.
• The compensation range of the exposure will be limited depending on the brightness of the
subject.
• Rotate the dial slowly but surely.
• When the aperture and shutter speed values are displayed in the screen in the Program AE
Mode, Program Shift operation and Exposure Compensation operation is switched every time
the front dial is pressed.
• In the Aperture-priority AE Mode, aperture setting operation (P90) and Exposure
Compensation operation is switched every time the front dial is pressed.
• In the Shutter-priority AE Mode, shutter speed setting operation (P90) and Exposure
Compensation operation is switched every time the front dial is pressed.
• Operation method can be changed with [EXPO. SETTINGS] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
(P129)
• In Quick Menu (P32) in [
] (LCD monitor style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation
display using 2/1 or the front dial, you can compensate the exposure with 3/4.
• In Quick Menu in [
] (Finder style), after selecting the Exposure Compensation display using
the front dial or 2/1, pressing the front dial or [MENU/SET] will allow you to compensate the
exposure with the front dial or 2/1.
VQT2A61
71
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 72 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures using Burst Mode
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter button is pressed.
Select the ones you really like from among the pictures you have taken.
Set the drive mode lever to [
].
A
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
A When Burst Mode is set to high speed [H].
• Hold down the shutter button fully to activate the
Burst Mode.
∫ Changing the burst speed
1
2
Select [BURST RATE] in the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the burst speed and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
3
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
[H] (High speed)
Burst speed (pictures/second)
¢1
With RAW files
Without RAW files
[L] (Low speed)
3
2
¢2
4 to 7
Depends on the remaining capacity of the card¢2
¢1 Number of recordable pictures
¢2 Pictures can be taken until the capacity of the card becomes full. However the burst speed
will become slower halfway. The exact timing of this depends on the aspect ratio, the picture
size, the setting for the quality and the type of card used.
• First burst speed has no relation with the transfer speed of the card.
• The burst speed values given above apply when the shutter speed is 1/60 or faster and when
the flash is not activated.
• The Burst Mode speed may become slower depending on the following settings.
– [SENSITIVITY] (P86)/[PICTURE SIZE] (P117)/[QUALITY] (P118)/[FOCUS PRIORITY]
(P128)/Focus mode
• Refer to P118 for information about RAW files.
72
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 73 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ Focusing in Burst Mode
The focus changes depending on the setting for [FOCUS PRIORITY] (P128) in the
[CUSTOM MENU] menu and the focus mode setting.
Focus mode
AFS
AFC¢1
MF
Focus Priority
ON
OFF
Focus
At the first picture
ON
Normal focusing¢2
OFF
Predicted focusing¢3
—
Focus set with Manual Focus
¢1 When subject is dark, the focus is fixed on the first picture.
¢2 The burst speed may become slower because the camera is continuously focusing on the
subject.
¢3 Burst speed takes priority, and focus is estimated within possible range.
Note
• We recommend using the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you want to keep the
shutter button pressed fully while taking pictures in Burst Mode. Refer to P161 for information
about the remote shutter.
• When the burst speed is set to [H], the exposure and white balance are fixed at the settings
used for the first picture for the subsequent pictures as well. When the burst speed is set to [L],
they are adjusted each time you take a picture.
• If you are following a moving subject while taking pictures in a place (landscape) indoors,
outdoors etc. where there is a large difference between the light and shade, it may take time
until the exposure is stable. If burst is used at this time, the exposure may not become optimal.
• Since the shutter speed becomes slower in dark places, the burst speed (pictures/second) may
become slower.
• The Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting. (Will not enlarge/
hold) You cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu.
• When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture.
• White Balance Bracket (P85) will record 3 pictures at 1 recording, so it will take longer to
be able to take next picture.
• Maximum of 3 films will be recorded depending on the Multi Film Bracket setting during
the Multi Film Bracket recording (P89).
• The Burst Mode is disabled during recording of the motion pictures.
VQT2A61
73
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 74 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures using Auto Bracket
Maximum of 7 pictures will be recorded with different exposure settings following the
Exposure Compensation range every time the shutter button is pressed.
You can select the picture with the desired exposure among different exposures.
With Auto Bracket
[STEP]: [3•1/3], [SEQUENCE]: [0/s/r]
1st picture
2nd picture
3rd picture
d0 EV
j1/3 EV
i1/3 EV
Set the drive mode lever to [
].
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
A
• If you press and hold the shutter button, the number
of pictures that you set is taken.
• The Auto Bracket indication A blinks until the
number of pictures that you set is taken.
• The picture count is reset to [0] if you change the
Auto Bracket setting, change the setting on the drive
mode lever or turn the camera off before all the
pictures that you set are taken.
∫ Changing the settings for [STEP] and [SEQUENCE] in Auto Bracket
1
2
74
Select [AUTO BRACKET] in the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [STEP] or [SEQUENCE] and then
press 1.
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 75 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
3
Press 3/4 to select the setting and then press [MENU/SET].
Item
Settings
[3•1/3] (3 pictures)
[3•2/3] (3 pictures)
[STEP]
Item
[SEQUENCE]
Settings
[0/`/_]
[`/0/_]
[5•1/3] (5 pictures)
[5•2/3] (5 pictures)
[7•1/3] (7 pictures)
[7•2/3] (7 pictures)
4
Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Note
• When taking pictures using Auto Bracket after setting the Exposure Compensation range, the
pictures taken are based on the selected Exposure Compensation range.
• The exposure may not be compensated with Auto Bracket depending on the brightness of the
subject.
• The Auto Review function is activated regardless of the Auto Review setting. (Will not enlarge/
hold) You cannot set the Auto Review function in the [SETUP] menu.
• When the flash is activated, you can take only 1 picture.
• Set number of pictures cannot be recorded if the recordable number of pictures is less than set
number of pictures.
• Settings for Multi Film Bracket have priority during the Multi Film Bracket recording
(P89).
• The Auto Bracket will be disabled during recording of the motion pictures.
VQT2A61
75
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 76 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures with the Self-timer
Set the drive mode lever to [ë].
Press the shutter button halfway to focus
and then press it fully to take the picture.
A When self-timer is set to [
A
].
• A picture is not taken until the subject is brought into
focus.
• If you want to press the shutter button fully to take a
picture even when the subject is not focused, set
[FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P128)
• The self-timer indicator B blinks and the shutter is activated after
10 seconds (or 2 seconds).
• If you press [MENU/SET] while taking a picture with the self-timer, it is
canceled.
• When [
] is selected, the self-timer indicator blinks again after the
first and the second pictures are taken and the shutter is activated
2 seconds after it blinks.
∫ Changing the time setting for the self-timer
1 Select [SELF-TIMER] in the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
2
Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press [MENU/SET].
Item
Settings
10 seconds
10 seconds/3 pictures
2 seconds
• If you set [
3
], after 10 seconds the camera takes 3 pictures at about 2 second intervals.
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Note
• When using a tripod etc., setting the self-timer to 2 seconds is a convenient way to avoid the
jitter caused by pressing the shutter button.
• We recommend using a tripod when recording with the self-timer.
• Depending on the recording conditions, the recording interval may become more than
2 seconds when [
] is selected.
• The flash output may not be constant when [
] is set.
] even if it is set to [
] while Multi Film Bracket recording (P89).
• Operation will be same as [
• Self-timer cannot be set to [
] or [
] in Intelligent Auto Mode.
• The self-timer will be disabled during recording of the motion pictures.
76
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 77 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Setting the method used to focus (AF mode)
This allows the focusing method that suits the positions and number of the subjects to be
selected.
Select the mode that matches the recording conditions and the composition.
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
Press 2 (
mode.
) and then press 2/1 to select AF
• You can also use the front dial to select.
Effect
Item
[š]: Face detection
The camera automatically detects the person’s face. The
focus and exposure can then be adjusted to fit that face no
matter what portion of the picture it is in. (max. 15 areas)
[
Focus and exposure can be adjusted to a specified subject.
Focus and exposure will keep on following the subject even
if it moves. (Dynamic tracking)
]: AF Tracking
[
]:
23-area-focusing
Up to 23 points for each AF area can be focused. This is
effective when the subject is not in the center of the screen.
(AF area frame will be same as image aspect ratio setting)
The camera focuses on the subject in the AF area on the
[Ø]: 1-area-focusing screen.
Position and size of the AF area can be changed.
Press [MENU/SET] to close.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close.
Note
• When the subject is not in the center of the composition in [Ø], you can bring the subject into
the AF area, fix the focus and exposure by pressing the shutter button halfway, move the
camera to the composition you want with the shutter button pressed halfway, and then take the
picture. (Only when the focus mode dial is set to [AFS])
• The camera is focusing on all the AF areas using [ ] when multiple AF areas (max. 23 areas)
light at the same time. If you want to determine the focus position to take pictures, switch the
AF mode to [Ø].
• If the AF mode is set to [š] or [ ], the AF area is not displayed until the picture is brought into
focus. Also, if you set the focus mode to [AFC] in [ ], AF area will not be displayed even if the
subject comes into focus.
• When it is set to [
] or [ ] during motion picture recording, it will switch to Multi auto focus
mode for motion pictures. AF area is not displayed at this time.
• The camera may detect the subjects other than a person as the face. In this case, switch the
AF mode to any modes other than [š] and then take a picture.
• [FACE RECOG.] only works when [š] is set.
VQT2A61
77
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 78 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• It is not possible to set [š] in the following cases.
– In [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP]
– In [NIGHT SCENERY] and [ILLUMINATIONS] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT]
• The [AF MODE] is fixed to [Ø] when using the digital zoom.
∫ About [š]
When the camera detects a person’s face, the following color AF area is
displayed.
Yellow:
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, the frame turns green
when the camera is focused.
White:
Displayed when more than one face is detected. Other faces that are the same distance
away as faces within the yellow AF areas are also focused.
• When [š] is selected and [METERING MODE] is set to multiple [C], the camera will adjust
the exposure to suit the person’s face.
• Under certain picture-taking conditions including the following cases, the facial recognition
function may fail to work, making it impossible to detect faces. [AF MODE] is switched to [
– When the face is not facing the camera
– When the face is at an angle
– When the face is extremely bright or dark
– When there is little contrast on the faces
– When the facial features are hidden behind sunglasses, etc.
– When the face appears small on the screen
– When there is rapid movement
– When the subject is other than a human being
– When the camera is shaking
Setting up [
].
] (AF Tracking)
Before locking
Locked
Bring the subject to the AF
tracking frame, and press the
shutter button halfway to lock
the subject.
A AF tracking frame (White)
B AF tracking frame (Yellow)
A
B
• When the subject is recognized, AF area will turn green and the subject will be locked.
Focus and exposure will be fixed automatically and continuously in accordance with
the movement of the subject when you release the shutter button (Dynamic tracking).
AF area will be displayed in yellow in this case.
• AF tracking is canceled when [MENU/SET ] or 2 is pressed.
Take the picture.
Note
• If it fails to lock, AF area will flash in red, and disappear. Try to lock again.
78
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 79 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• AF Tracking will not operate when it has failed to AF track. AF mode will be switched to [Ø] in
that case.
• [FACE RECOG.] does not work when AF tracking is active.
•[
] will operate as [Ø] in the [STANDARD] (
), [DYNAMIC] (
) or [SMOOTH]
(
) in Film Mode.
• Dynamic tracking function may not work in the following cases:
– When the subject is too small
– When the recording location is too dark or bright
– When the subject is moving too fast
– When the background has the same or similar color to the subject.
– When jitter is occurring
– When zoom is operated
Setting the AF area
AF area can be moved when [Ø] is selected. The size of AF area can also be changed.
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Select [Ø] and then press 4.
• AF area setting screen is displayed. It will return to previous
screen by pressing [DISPLAY].
Press 3/4/2/1 to move the AF area.
• You can set to arbitrary position of the screen. (It cannot be set
to edge of the screen)
• The AF area returns to the center when [‚] is pressed.
Rotate the front dial to change the size of AF area.
A
Front dial clockwise: Enlarge
Front dial counter clockwise: Shrink
• It can be changed to 4 different sizes of “spot” A, “normal” B,
“large” C, and “extra large” D.
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
BC D
∫ Move the AF area easily while taking pictures
When the [DIRECT AF AREA] (P128) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [ON] while
[Ø] is selected, it is possible to move the AF area directly with 3/4/2/1.
It is also possible to change the size of AF area by rotating the front dial in the screen to
set the position.
• [SENSITIVITY] (P86), [Fn BUTTON SET] (P33), [AF MODE] (P77), or [WHITE BALANCE]
(P83) cannot be set with 3/4/2/1. Make the setting with the Quick Menu (P32).
Note
• The spot metering target can also be moved to match the AF area when using [Ù]. (P119)
• Set the size of AF area to “normal”, “large”, or “extra large” when it is hard to focus using the
“spot”.
• The [DIRECT AF AREA] will be fixed to [OFF] when Advanced Scene Mode, Scene Mode, or
My Color Mode is selected.
• [DIRECT AF AREA] is disabled during motion picture recording.
VQT2A61
79
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 80 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking Pictures with Manual Focus
Use this function when you want to fix the focus or when the distance between the lens
and the subject is determined and you do not want to activate auto focus.
Set the focus mode dial to [MF].
• [
] is displayed on a screen for about 5 seconds.
Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject.
• Screen will be enlarged about 5 times as MF assist.
• The enlarged area can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• MF assist disappears about 10 seconds after you stop
pressing 3/4/2/1 or rotating the focus ring.
• MF assist is enlarged from 5 times to 10 times when the front
dial is rotated clockwise. It will return to 5 times by rotating the front dial counter
clockwise.
Take the picture.
∫ MF ASSIST
If [MF ASSIST] (P129) of [CUSTOM MENU] menu is set to [OFF], an enlarged screen will
not be displayed as MF assist, even if focus ring is rotated. To display the MF assist, press
2 and then press [MENU/SET] for enlarged display.
1 Press 2 to display the MF assist screen.
2
Press 3/4/2/1 to change the position of the MF assist
screen.
• The following will return the MF assistance to the original
position.
– Switching the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
– Changing [ASPECT RATIO] or [PICTURE SIZE].
– Turning the camera off.
3
4
Press [MENU/SET] to magnify the MF assist screen.
• Rotate the focus ring to focus on the subject.
• The enlarged area can be moved by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• MF assist is enlarged from 5 times to 10 times when the front dial
is rotated clockwise. It will return to 5 times by rotating the front
dial counter-clockwise.
Press [MENU/SET] to close MF assist.
• The screen returns to the previous screen.
∫ Technique for Manual Focus
1 Rotate the focus ring to focus on the
subject.
2 Rotate it a little more.
3 Finely focus on the subject by rotating the
focus ring slowly in reverse.
80
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 81 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ About the focus distance reference mark
(When 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used)
The focus distance reference mark is a mark
used to measure the focus distance.
Use this when taking pictures with Manual
Focus or taking close-up pictures.
A Focus distance reference mark
B Focus distance reference line
C 0.5 m (1.64 feet)
• If you are taking close-up pictures
– We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P76).
– The effective focus range (depth of field) is significantly narrowed. Therefore, if the distance
between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the subject, it may become
difficult to focus on it again.
– The resolution of the periphery of the picture may decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction.
Note
• When the MF assist is started by 2, MF assist will continue to display even after 10 seconds
has past without operating the focus ring or 3/4/2/1.
• If you use the zoom function after focusing on the subject, focus on the subject again.
• The MF assist does not appear when using the digital zoom or recording motion pictures.
• Even if 2 is pressed in My Color Mode, the MF assist screen is not displayed.
• After canceling power save mode, focus on the subject again.
[REC] mode:
Fixing the Focus and the Exposure (AF/AE Lock)
This is useful when you want to take a picture of a subject outside the AF area or the
contrast is too strong and you cannot achieve appropriate exposure.
∫ Fixing the exposure only
Align the screen with the subject.
Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the
exposure.
A [AF/AE LOCK] button
• The aperture value and the shutter speed light.
• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AE Lock is canceled.
VQT2A61
81
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 82 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the
camera as you compose the picture.
B AE lock indication
B
Press the shutter button halfway to focus
on the subject and then press it fully.
∫ Fixing the focus or the focus/the exposure
1
2
3
Select [AF/AE LOCK] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [AF] or [AF/AE] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Taking pictures when [AF] or [AF/AE] is set
1 Aim the lens at the subject.
2 Press and hold [AF/AE LOCK] to fix the focus and the exposure.
• When [AF] is selected, [AFL], the focus indication, aperture value, the shutter speed light
when the subject is focused.
• When [AF/AE] is selected, [AFL], [AEL], the focus indication, aperture value and the
shutter speed light when the subject is focused and the exposure is set.
• If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.
3 While pressing [AF/AE LOCK], move the camera to the composition you would like to
take and then press the shutter button fully.
Note
• If you set [AF/AE LOCK HOLD] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu to [ON], you can fix the focus
and the exposure even if you release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it. (P127)
• The brightness of the image displayed on the LCD monitor/viewfinder (Live View) will be also
locked when the AE lock is performed.
• AF Lock only is effective when taking pictures in Manual Exposure Mode.
• AE Lock only is effective during Manual Focus or Preview Mode.
• AE lock and AF lock can be used during motion picture recording, but AE/AF lock cannot be
performed again during motion picture recording. During motion picture recording only
cancelation of AE/AF lock can be performed.
• The exposure is set, even if the brightness of the subject changes.
• The subject can be focused again by pressing the shutter button halfway even when AE is
locked.
• Program Shift can be set even when AE is locked.
82
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 83 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Adjusting the White Balance
In sunlight, under incandescent lights or in other such conditions where the color of white
takes on a reddish or bluish tinge, this item adjusts to the color of white which is closest to
what is seen by the eye in accordance with the light source.
Press 1 (
).
Press 2/1 to select the white balance and then
press [MENU/SET] to set.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Item
Recording conditions
[AWB]
Automatic adjustment
[V]
When taking pictures outdoors under a clear sky
[Ð]
When taking pictures outdoors under a cloudy sky
[î]
When taking pictures outdoors in the shade
[Ñ]
When taking pictures under incandescent lights
]¢
[
[
[
1
]/[
]
When taking pictures with the flash only
2
]
When using the preset white balance
When using the preset color temperature setting
¢ It will operate as [AWB] during motion picture recording.
∫ Auto white balance
Depending on the conditions prevailing when pictures are taken, the pictures may take on
a reddish or bluish tinge. Furthermore, when a multiple number of light sources are being
used or there is nothing with a color close to white, Auto White Balance may not function
properly. In a case like this, set the white balance to a mode other than [AWB].
1 Auto white balance will work within this range.
2 Blue sky
3 Cloudy sky (Rain)
4 Shade
5 TV screen
6 Sunlight
7 White fluorescent light
8 Incandescent light bulb
9 Sunrise and sunset
10 Candlelight
KlKelvin color Temperature
2)
3)
4)
1)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
VQT2A61
83
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 84 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• The optimal white balance will differ depending on the type of halogen lighting being recorded
under so use [AWB], [ 1 ] or [ 2 ].
• The white balance might not be adjusted for a subject that the flash cannot reach when the
flash is used.
• The white balance is memorized even if the camera is turned off, but [WHITE BALANCE] for
the Advanced Scene Mode or the Scene Mode is set to [AWB] when the Advanced Scene
Mode or the Scene Mode is changed and then used.
• White balance is fixed to [AWB] in following conditions.
– In Intelligent Auto Mode
– In [OUTDOOR PORTRAIT] and [INDOOR PORTRAIT] in [PORTRAIT]
– In [SCENERY]
– In [OUTDOOR SPORTS] and [INDOOR SPORTS] in [SPORTS]
– In [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP]
– In [NIGHT PORTRAIT]
– In [SUNSET] or [PARTY] in Scene Mode
– My Color Mode
Setting the white balance manually
Set the white balance value. Use to match the condition when taking photographs.
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Select [
1
] or [
2
] and then press 3.
Aim the camera at a sheet of white paper etc. so
that the frame in the center is filled by the white
object only and then press [MENU/SET].
Note
• You may not be able to properly set a white balance if the subject is too bright or too dark.
In this case, adjust the subject to an appropriate brightness and then reset the white
balance.
Setting the color temperature
You can set the color temperature manually for taking natural pictures in different lighting
conditions. The color of light is measured as a number in degrees Kelvin. As the color
temperature increases, the picture becomes more bluish. As the color temperature
decreases, the picture becomes more reddish.
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Select [
] and then press 3.
Press 3/4 to select the color temperature and
then press [MENU/SET].
• You can set a color temperature from [2500K] to [10000K].
• You can also use the front dial to set.
84
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 85 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Finely adjusting the white balance [
]
You can finely adjust the white balance when you cannot acquire the desired hue by
setting the white balance.
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Select the white balance and then press 4.
Press 3/4/2/1 to adjust the white balance and
then press [MENU/SET].
2:
1:
3:
4:
A (AMBER: ORANGE)
B (BLUE: BLUISH)
G_ (GREEN: GREENISH)
M` (MAGENTA: REDDISH)
Note
• If you finely adjust the white balance to A (amber), the white balance icon on the LCD monitor/
Viewfinder will change to orange. If you finely adjust the white balance to B (blue), the white
balance icon on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder will change to blue.
• If you finely adjust the white balance to G_ (green) or M` (magenta), [_] (green) or [`]
(magenta) appears beside the white balance icon on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder.
• Press [‚] to return to the center point.
• Select the center point if you are not finely adjusting the white balance.
• The white balance fine adjustment setting is reflected in the picture when using the flash.
• You can finely adjust the white balance independently for each white balance item.
• The white balance fine adjustment setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.
• The white balance fine adjustment level returns to the standard setting (center point) in the
following cases.
– When you reset the white balance in [ 1 ] or [ 2 ]
– When you reset the color temperature manually in [
]
White Balance Bracket
Bracket setting is performed based on the adjustment values for the white balance fine
adjustment, and 3 pictures with different colors are automatically recorded when the
shutter button is pressed once.
Finely adjust the white balance in step 2 of the
“Finely adjusting the white balance” procedure,
and rotate the front dial to set the bracket.
Front dial clockwise: Horizontal (A to B)
Front dial counter-clockwise: Vertical (Gi to Mj)
Press [MENU/SET].
• You can also use the front dial to set.
Note
•[
] is displayed in white balance icon in the LCD monitor/viewfinder when the White Balance
Bracket is set.
VQT2A61
85
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 86 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• The White Balance Bracket setting is released when the power has been turned off (including
power save mode).
• Pictures can be taken with White Balance Bracket regardless of the drive mode settings.
• You will only hear the shutter sound once.
• White Balance Bracket cannot be set when the [QUALITY] is set to [
], [
], or [
].
• White Balance Bracket does not work when recording motion picture.
[REC] mode:
Setting the Light Sensitivity
This allows the sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity) to be set. Setting to a higher figure
enables pictures to be taken even in dark places without the resulting pictures coming out
dark.
Press 3 (
).
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the ISO sensitivity and
then press [MENU/SET] to set.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
ISO sensitivity
Recording location
(recommended)
100
3200
When it is light (outdoors)
When it is dark
Shutter speed
Slow
Fast
Noise
Less
Increased
ISO sensitivity
Settings
AUTO¢
The ISO sensitivity is automatically adjusted according to the
brightness.
¢
The ISO sensitivity is adjusted according to the movement of
the subject and the brightness.
(Intelligent)
100/200/400/800/1600/3200
The ISO sensitivity is fixed to various settings.
(When the [ISO INCREMENTS] in [REC] mode menu
(P123) is set to [1/3 EV], items of ISO sensitivity that can
be set will increase.)
¢ When the [ISO LIMIT SET] of [REC] mode menu (P123) is set to anything except [OFF],
it is set automatically within the value set in [ISO LIMIT SET].
It is set as following when the [ISO LIMIT SET] is set to [OFF].
• When [AUTO] is selected, ISO sensitivity is adjusted automatically depending on
brightness within a maximum setting of [ISO400].
86
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 87 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
•[
• When setting to [
], ISO sensitivity will adjust automatically depending on brightness
within the maximum setting of [ISO800]. ([ISO400] when the flash is used)
• The maximum ISO sensitivity during motion picture recording is [ISO1600].
] will operate as [AUTO] while recording a motion picture. Also, [ISO LIMIT SET] is fixed to [OFF].
∫ About [
] (Intelligent ISO sensitivity control)
The camera automatically sets the optimum ISO sensitivity and shutter speed to suit the
movement of the subject and brightness of the scene to minimize the jitter of the subject.
• The shutter speed is not fixed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. It is continuously
changing to match the movement of the subject until the shutter button is pressed fully. Confirm
the actual shutter speed on the information display for the picture being played back.
Note
• The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the
amount of picture noise.
• Refer to P67 for the flash range.
• Depending on the brightness and how fast the subject is moving, jitter may not be avoided even
if [
] is selected.
• Movements may not be detected when a moving subject is small, when a moving subject is at
the edge of the screen or when a subject has moved at the very moment when the shutter
button was pressed fully.
• The setting is fixed to [
] in the following cases.
– In [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode
– In [INDOOR PORTRAIT], [NORMAL SPORTS], [OUTDOOR SPORTS] and [INDOOR
SPORTS] in Advanced Scene Mode
• Program Shift cannot be activated when the ISO sensitivity is set to [
].
• You cannot select [
] in Shutter-priority AE Mode and Manual Exposure Mode. Also, you
cannot select [AUTO] in Manual Exposure Mode.
• To avoid picture noise, we recommend reducing the ISO sensitivity, setting [NOISE RED.] in
[FILM MODE] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE RED.] towards [`] to take
pictures. (P88)
• If you want to set ISO sensitivity and record a motion picture, use the Creative Motion Picture
Mode. (P108)
[REC] mode:
Change tone of the color for the picture to be
taken (Film Mode)
[You can only select [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] (
) in [ ], [¿], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ ] and [ ] mode.]
Just as each type of film for film cameras has its own color tone and contrast
characteristics, Film Mode allows you to select up to 9 different “digital films”, color tones,
in the same way as you would select different films for film cameras.
Select different settings in film mode to match the photo look you wish to achieve.
Press [FILM MODE].
A [FILM MODE] button
VQT2A61
87
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 88 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Press 2/1 to select an item.
• You can also use the front dial to select.
• When you press [DISPLAY] on the screen shown right,
explanations about each film mode are displayed. (When you
press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the previous
screen.)
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Item
Effect
[STANDARD] (COLOR)
This is the standard setting.
[DYNAMIC] (COLOR)
The saturation and contrast of the stored colors are increased.
[NATURE] (COLOR)
Brighter red, green and blue. Enhanced beauty of nature.
[SMOOTH] (COLOR)
The contrast is lowered for smoother and clearer color.
[NOSTALGIC] (COLOR)
Lower saturation and contrast. Reflecting passage of time.
[VIBRANT] (COLOR)
Higher saturation and contrast than dynamic.
[STANDARD] (
)
This is the standard setting.
[DYNAMIC] (
)
The contrast is increased.
[SMOOTH] (
)
Smooths the picture without losing the skin texture.
[MY FILM 1]/[MY FILM 2]
The saved setting is used.
[MULTI FILM]
It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with
the setting every time the shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3
pictures)
Note
• In Film Mode, the camera may do something equivalent to pull processing or push processing
to create a picture with particular characteristics. The shutter speed may become very slow at
this time.
Adjusting each film mode to the desired setting
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Press 2/1 to select a film.
Press 3/4 to select an item and 2/1 to adjust.
• You can also use the front dial to adjust.
• Registered settings are memorized even if the camera is
turned off.
Press [FILM MODE], press 3/4 to select an item,
and then press [MENU/SET].
88
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 89 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• You can register 2 settings. ([MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2])
(After registering, the film mode name that was registered previously is displayed.)
• [STANDARD] is registered in [MY FILM 1] and [MY FILM 2] at the time of purchase.
Item
[CONTRAST]
Effect
Increases the difference between the brightness and the
[r]
darkness in the picture.
[s]
[SHARPNESS]
[SATURATION]
Decreases the difference between the brightness and the
darkness in the picture.
[r] The picture is sharply defined.
[s] The picture is softly focused.
[r] The colors in the picture become vivid.
[s] The colors in the picture become natural.
[r]
The noise reduction effect is enhanced. Picture resolution may
deteriorate slightly.
[s]
The noise reduction effect is reduced. You can obtain pictures
with higher resolution.
[NOISE RED.]
Note
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places. To avoid picture noise, we
recommend setting [NOISE RED.] towards [_] or setting the items except [NOISE RED.]
towards [`] to take pictures.
• If you adjust a film mode, [_] is displayed beside the film mode icon on the LCD monitor/
Viewfinder.
• You cannot adjust [SATURATION] in the black and white settings in Film Mode.
• Film Mode cannot be adjusted in the Intelligent Auto Mode, Advanced Scene Mode and Scene
Mode.
Multi Film Bracket
It will take pictures changing the type of film in accordance with the setting every time the
shutter button is pressed. (Up to 3 pictures)
• You can also set from the Quick Menu. (P32)
Press 2/1 to select [MULTI FILM].
Select either [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2], or
[MULTI FILM 3] with 3/4, and then select the film
to be set for each with 2/1.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
• [OFF] can be selected only for [MULTI FILM 3].
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
Focus on the subject and take a picture.
• It will continuously take pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed when it is set to
Burst Mode. (Up to 3 pictures)
VQT2A61
89
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 90 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• When using a self-timer, up to 3 pictures with set film will be taken if the shutter button is
pressed. (It will operate same as [
] even if it is set to [
].)
• Multi film indication ([ ]) displayed on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder will flash until all
pictures of preset amount are taken.
Note
• [STANDARD] is registered in [MULTI FILM 1], [MULTI FILM 2] and [OFF] is registered in
[MULTI FILM 3] at the time of purchase.
• White Balance Bracket will be disabled when the Multi Film Bracket is set.
• Multi Film Bracket does not work while recording motion pictures.
[REC] mode: ±´
Taking pictures by specifying the aperture/
shutter speed
[
] Aperture-priority AE
Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background. Set
the aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background.
Set the mode dial to [
].
Rotate the front dial to set the aperture
value.
• It will switch between aperture setting operation and
Exposure Compensation operation every time the
front dial is pressed.
Take a picture.
[
] Shutter-priority AE
When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject, set with a faster shutter
speed. When you want to create a trail effect, set to a slower shutter speed.
Set the mode dial to [
].
Rotate the front dial to set the shutter
speed.
• It will switch between shutter speed setting operation
and Exposure Compensation operation every time
the front dial is pressed.
Take a picture.
90
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 91 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• It will be a normal motion picture recording when recording a motion picture. Use the
Creative Motion Picture Mode when you would like to record by setting the aperture or
shutter speed. (P108)
• How the Exposure Compensation is switched can be changed by [EXPO. SETTINGS] (P129)
in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
• The brightness of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder and the recorded pictures may differ. Check the
pictures on the playback screen.
• Set the aperture value to a higher number when the subject is too bright in Aperture-priority AE
Mode. Set the aperture value to a lower number when the subject is too dim.
• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the setting for the front dial becomes effective if you
rotate the aperture ring to the [A] position and the aperture ring setting takes priority if you
rotate the aperture ring to a position other than [A] in Aperture-priority AE Mode.
• The aperture value and the shutter speed displayed on the screen turn red and blink when the
exposure is not adequate.
• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slow.
• When the flash is activated, the shutter speed cannot be set to faster than 1/160th of a second
in Shutter-priority AE Mode. (P68)
• If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the
screen counts down in Shutter-priority AE Mode.
• [ ] and [
] cannot be set for Shutter-priority AE Mode.
• The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [AUTO] when you switch the recording mode to
Shutter-priority AE Mode while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [
] (Intelligent).
[REC] mode: ²
Taking picture by setting the exposure manually
Determine the exposure by manually setting the aperture value and the shutter speed.
Set the mode dial to [²].
Rotate the front dial to set the aperture
and shutter speed.
• It will switch between aperture setting operation and
shutter speed setting operation every time the front
dial is pressed.
• You can also set the focus manually by rotating the
focus mode dial to [MF]. (P80)
Press the shutter button halfway.
• The manual exposure assistance A appears on the
lower portion of the screen to indicate the exposure.
• Set the aperture value and the shutter speed again
when the exposure is not adequate.
Take the picture.
A
VQT2A61
91
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 92 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ Manual Exposure Assistance
The exposure is adequate.
Set to faster shutter speed or larger aperture value.
Set to slower shutter speed or smaller aperture value.
• The manual exposure assistance is an approximation. We recommend checking the pictures
on the playback screen.
∫ About [B] (Bulb)
If you set the shutter speed to [B], the shutter stays open while the shutter button is
pressed fully (up to about 4 minutes).
The shutter closes if you release the shutter button.
Use this when you want to keep the shutter open for a long time to take pictures of
fireworks, a night scene etc.
• If you set the shutter speed to [B], [B] is displayed on the screen.
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], use a sufficiently charged battery.
(P22)
• We recommend using a tripod or the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) when you take
pictures with the shutter speed set to [B]. Refer to P161 for information about the remote
shutter.
• When you take pictures with the shutter speed set to [B], noise may become visible. To avoid
picture noise, we recommend setting [LONG SHTR NR] in the [REC] mode menu to [ON]
before taking pictures. (P123)
• The manual exposure assistance does not appear.
Note
• It will be a normal motion picture recording when recording a motion picture. Use the
Creative Motion Picture Mode when you would like to record by setting the aperture or
shutter speed. (P108)
• It is possible to change the switching method of aperture and shutter speed settings with the
[EXPO. SETTINGS] (P129) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
• The brightness of the LCD monitor/Viewfinder may differ from the brightness of the actual
pictures. Check the pictures using the playback screen.
• If the exposure is not adequate, the aperture value and the shutter speed turn red and blink
when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• [‡], [
], [ ] and [
] for flash cannot be set.
• The [SENSITIVITY] is automatically set to [ISO100] when you switch the recording mode to
Manual exposure while the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [
] (Intelligent).
• If you press the shutter button fully when the shutter speed is slow, the shutter speed on the
screen counts down.
• When you use a lens with an aperture ring, the aperture ring setting takes priority.
92
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 93 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Confirm the effects of aperture and shutter speed
(Preview Mode)
Confirm the effects of aperture
You can check the depth of field (effective focus range) before taking a picture by closing
the leaf shutter to the aperture value you set.
Press [
] A (preview button).
• Preview screen is displayed. It will return to
previous screen when [
] is pressed.
∫ Depth of field properties
¢1
Aperture value
Small
Focus length of the lens
Tele
Wide
Distance to the subject
Near
Distant
Shallow (Narrow)¢2
Deep (Wide)¢3
Depth of field (effective focus range)
Large
¢1 Recording conditions
¢2 Example: When you want to take a picture with a blurred background etc.
¢3 Example: When you want to take a picture with everything in focus including the background
etc.
Confirm the effects of shutter speed
Movement can be confirmed by displaying the actual picture that will be taken with that
shutter speed.
When the shutter speed is set for high speed, display in the shutter speed preview will be
displayed like a time-release film. It is used in cases such as stopping the movement of
running water.
Press [DISPLAY] while displaying the preview screen.
• Shutter speed preview screen is
displayed. It will return to previous
screen by pressing [DISPLAY]
again.
DISPLAY
Note
• Operation method of [
] can be changed with [PREVIEW HOLD] of [CUSTOM MENU] menu
(P127).
• It is possible to record while in Preview Mode.
• Range for shutter speed effect check is 8 seconds to 1/1000th of a second.
VQT2A61
93
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 94 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking expressive portraits and landscape
pictures (Advanced Scene Mode)
You can take high-quality pictures of such subjects as people, scenery, sporting events
and activities, flowers and people in night scenes in accordance with the surrounding
conditions.
Set the mode dial.
Press 2/1 to select the Advanced Scene Mode.
• You can also use the front dial to select.
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• The menu screen is switched to the recording screen in the
selected Advanced Scene Mode.
∫ About the information
• If you press [DISPLAY] when selecting an Advanced Scene Mode in
step 2, explanations about each Advanced Scene Mode are
displayed. (If you press [DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the
screen shown in step 2.)
Note
• To change the Advanced Scene Mode, press [MENU/SET], and return to above step 2 by
pressing 1, while selecting the Advanced Scene Mode menu [ ] by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• The Advanced Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Advanced Scene
Mode is changed and then used.
• When you take a picture with a Advanced Scene Mode that is not adequate for the purpose,
the hue of the picture may differ from the actual scene.
• The following items cannot be set in Advanced Scene Mode because the camera automatically
adjusts them to the optimal setting.
– [SENSITIVITY]/Items other than [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] (
) in Film Mode/
[METERING MODE]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]/[I.EXPOSURE]/[DIGITAL ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]
∫ About the aperture value and the shutter speed when you select a creative setting
• You can change the aperture value and the shutter speed if you select
a creative setting in Advanced Scene Mode. If you cannot get an
adequate exposure when you rotate the front dial, the aperture value
and the shutter speed or the selection cursor will turn red.
• You can also press 2/1 to set.
• It will switch between aperture setting or shutter speed setting
operation and Exposure Compensation operation when the front dial is
pressed.
94
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 95 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[PORTRAIT]
The person stands out from the background and has a healthier complexion.
[NORMAL PORTRAIT]
Shades the background and photographs skin color beautifully.
[SOFT SKIN]
Makes the skin surface appear especially smooth.
• When [SOFT SKIN] is selected, if a part of the background is a colored similar to the color
of the person’s skin, it also may show some smoothing.
• When [SOFT SKIN] is selected, this mode may not be effective when there is insufficient
brightness.
[OUTDOOR PORTRAIT]
Prevents faces from appearing dark when taking photographs outside.
[INDOOR PORTRAIT]
Sets the ISO sensitivity setting to the appropriate setting to prevent blurring of photo
subject for indoor photography.
[CREATIVE PORTRAIT]
You can change the amount of background blurring by changing the aperture value (P90).
∫ Technique for Portrait mode
To make this mode more effective:
1 Rotate the zoom ring as far as possible to Tele.
2 Move close to the subject to make this mode more effective.
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [PORTRAIT] are used.
• In [INDOOR PORTRAIT], the Intelligent ISO sensitivity control operates, and the maximum ISO
sensitivity level becomes [ISO400].
• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].
[SCENERY]
This allows you to take pictures of a wide landscape.
[NORMAL SCENERY]
The focus adjusts onto far away subjects as a priority.
[NATURE]
The best setting for photographing natural scenery.
[ARCHITECTURE]
This setting takes sharp photographs of architecture. The guide lines are displayed. (P63)
[CREATIVE SCENERY]
The shutter speed (P90) can be changed in the [NORMAL SCENERY] setting.
VQT2A61
95
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 96 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [SCENERY] are used.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
[SPORTS]
Set here when you want to take pictures of sports scenes or other fast-moving events.
[NORMAL SPORTS]
Controls the ISO sensitivity while stopping movement with a high shutter speed.
[OUTDOOR SPORTS]
Fast shutter speed for stopping movement when taking photographs outdoors in good
weather.
[INDOOR SPORTS]
Increases the ISO sensitivity and increases the shutter speed to prevent blurring for
indoor photography.
Where higher ISO setting is used, the photo may show slightly more noise. This is
normal, this is not a malfunction.
[CREATIVE SPORTS]
The shutter speed (P90) can be changed in the [NORMAL SPORTS] setting.
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [SPORTS] are used.
[CLOSE-UP]
This mode allows you to take close-up pictures of a subject, e.g. when taking pictures of
flowers.
(The distance from the subject when you take close-up pictures differs depending on the
lens you are using.)
[FLOWER]
Flowers outdoors are recorded with natural colors in macro settings. The guide lines
are displayed. (P63)
[FOOD]
You can take pictures of food with a natural hue without being affected by the ambient
light in restaurants etc.
[OBJECTS]
You can take clear and vivid pictures of accessories or small objects in a collection.
[CREATIVE CLOSE-UP]
You can change the degree of blurring of the background by changing the aperture
value in the macro settings. (P90)
96
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 97 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• During motion picture recording, the motion picture will reflect the settings for each
mode with [FLOWER], [FOOD] and [OBJECTS]. [CREATIVE CLOSE-UP] is suitable for
near distance motion picture recording.
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer.
• We recommend setting the flash to [Œ] when you take pictures at close range.
• Refer to “About the focus distance reference mark” on P81 for the focus range.
• When a subject is close to the camera, the effective focus range is significantly narrowed.
Therefore, if the distance between the camera and the subject is changed after focusing on the
subject, it may become difficult to focus on it again.
• Close-up mode gives priority to a subject close to the camera, so it takes longer to focus on the
further subjects.
• When you take pictures at close range, the resolution of the periphery of the picture may
decrease slightly. This is not a malfunction.
• If the lens becomes dirty with fingerprints or dust, the lens may not be able to focus on the
subject correctly.
[NIGHT PORTRAIT]
This allows you to take pictures of a person and the background with near real-life
brightness.
[NIGHT PORTRAIT]
Uses when taking photographs of people with night scenery as a background.
• Open the flash.
(You can set to [
].)
• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].
[NIGHT SCENERY]
Night scenery is vividly photographed with a slow shutter.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
[ILLUMINATIONS]
Illuminations are photographed beautifully.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
[CREATIVE NIGHT SCENERY]
The aperture value (P90) can be changed in the [NIGHT SCENERY] setting.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
∫ Technique for Night portrait mode
• Since the shutter speed becomes slower, we recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for
taking pictures.
• When [NIGHT PORTRAIT] is selected, keep the subject still for about 1 second after taking the
picture.
Note
• During motion picture recording, low light settings are used, which will provide better
pictures in dimly lit rooms or at nightfall.
• Noise may become visible when you take pictures in dark places.
• The shutter may remain closed after taking the picture. This is due to signal processing and is
not a malfunction.
VQT2A61
97
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 98 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode: ¿
Taking pictures that match the scene being
recorded ( : Scene Mode)
When you select a Scene Mode to match the subject and recording situation, the camera
sets the optimal exposure and hue to obtain the desired picture.
Set the mode dial to [
].
Press 2/1 to select the Scene Mode.
• You can also use the front dial to select.
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• The menu screen is switched to the recording screen in the
selected Scene Mode.
∫ About the information
• If you press [DISPLAY] when selecting a Scene Mode in step 2,
explanations about each Scene Mode are displayed. (If you press
[DISPLAY] again, the screen returns to the Scene Mode menu.)
Note
• To change the Scene Mode, press [MENU/SET], and return to above step 2 by pressing 1,
while selecting the Scene Mode menu [ ] by pressing 3/4/2/1.
• The Scene Mode flash setting is reset to the initial setting when the Scene Mode is changed
and then used.
• When you take a picture with a Scene Mode that is not adequate for the purpose, the hue of the
picture may differ from the actual scene.
• The following items cannot be set in Scene Mode because the camera automatically adjusts
them to the optimal setting.
– [SENSITIVITY]/Items other than [STANDARD] and [STANDARD] (
) in Film Mode/
[METERING MODE]/[FLASH SYNCHRO]/[I.EXPOSURE]/[DIGITAL ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]
ï [SUNSET]
Select this when you want to take pictures of a sunset view. This allows you to take vivid
pictures of the red color of the sun.
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [SUNSET] are used.
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
98
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 99 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
2 [PARTY]
Select this when you want to take pictures at a wedding reception, an indoor party etc.
This allows you to take pictures of people and the background with near real-life
brightness.
∫ Technique for Party mode
• Open the flash. (You can set to [
] or [
].)
• We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer for taking pictures.
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [PARTY] are used.
• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].
: [BABY1]/; [BABY2]
This takes pictures of a baby with a healthy complexion. When you use the flash, the light
from it is weaker than usual.
It is possible to set different birthdays and names for [BABY1] and [BABY2]. You can
select to have these appear at the time of playback, or have them stamped on the
recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P136).
∫ Birthday/Name setting
1 Press 3/4 to select [AGE] or [NAME] and then press 1.
2 Press 3/4 to select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Enter the birthday or name.
Birthday:
Name:
2/1: Select the items (year/month/day).
3/4: Setting.
[MENU/SET]: Exit.
For details on how to enter characters, read the
[TITLE EDIT] section on P135.
• When the birthday or name is set, [AGE] or [NAME] is automatically set to [ON].
• If [ON] is selected when the birthday or name has not been registered, the setting screen
appears automatically.
4
Press [MENU/SET] to finish.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
∫ To cancel [AGE] and [NAME]
Select the [OFF] setting in step 2 of the “Birthday/Name setting” procedure.
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for [PORTRAIT] are used.
• The age and name can be printed out using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” bundled
software on the CD-ROM (supplied).
• If [AGE] or [NAME] is set to [OFF] even when the birthday or name has been set, the age or
name will not be displayed. Before taking pictures, set [AGE] or [NAME] to [ON].
• Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes [ISO400].
• If the camera is turned on with [BABY1]/[BABY2] set, the age and name are displayed at the
lower left of the screen for about 5 seconds, along with the current date and time.
• If the age is not properly displayed, check the clock and birthday settings.
• The birthday setting and name setting can be reset with [RESET].
• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [š].
VQT2A61
99
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 100 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
í [PET]
Select this when you want to take pictures of a pet such as a dog or a cat.
You can set your pet’s birthday and name. You can select to have these appear at the time
of playback, or have them stamped on the recorded image using [TEXT STAMP] (P136).
For information about [AGE] or [NAME], refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] on P99.
Note
• It will be a normal motion picture recording during the motion picture recording.
• The initial setting for the AF assist lamp is [OFF].
• Intelligent ISO sensitivity control is activated, and maximum ISO sensitivity level becomes
[ISO800].
• The initial setting for [AF MODE] is [
].
• Refer to [BABY1]/[BABY2] for other information about this mode.
[REC] mode:
Taking pictures while adjusting color
(
: My Color Mode)
Easily confirm the subject on the LCD monitor or viewfinder (Live View) and adjust the
color, brightness, or saturation before taking a picture.
Set the mode dial to [
].
Press 3/4 to select an item and press 2/1 to
adjust the item.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
Item
Adjustment contents
[COLOR]
This will adjust the color of the
image from red light to blue light.
(11 steps in n5)
[BRIGHTNESS]
This will adjust the brightness of
the image. (11 steps in n5)
[SATURATION]
This will adjust the color intensity
of the image from black and
white to vivid color.
(11 steps in n5)
[RESET]
Return all settings to default
• Description of adjustment is displayed by pressing [DISPLAY]. (It will return to selection
screen when it is pressed again.)
Press [MENU/SET] to set.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to set.
• Recording screen is displayed.
100
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 101 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ Return My color settings to default
1 Select [RESET] in above step 2.
2 Press 2 to select [YES] and press [MENU/SET].
• Adjusted value for each item returns to standard (center point).
∫ Readjust the My color settings
Return to above step 2 by pressing front dial or one of 3/4/2/1.
• [SENSITIVITY] (P86), [Fn BUTTON SET] (P33) or [AF MODE] (P77) cannot be set with 3/4/
2. Make the setting with the Quick Menu (P32).
Note
• During motion picture recording, settings for My Color Mode are used.
• Adjustments made with My Color Mode are not in effect in other recording modes.
• My color setting set is memorized even if the camera is turned off.
• Icons for the adjusted items are displayed in the LCD monitor/viewfinder when the My Color
settings are adjusted. Displayed icon is the one for direction of adjustment.
• Auto Bracket cannot be used in My Color Mode.
• AF tracking may not function if you adjust [SATURATION] to make the color lighter.
[REC] mode:
Registering Personal Menu Settings
(Registering custom settings)
It is possible to register up to 3 sets of current camera settings as custom sets.
• Set to the mode dial to the desired mode and select the desired menu settings in advance.
Select [CUST. SET MEM.] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the custom set to register
and then press [MENU/SET].
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• When [YES] is selected, the settings that were previously
stored are overwritten.
• You cannot save the following menu items because they affect
other recording modes.
– [CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET] and [SCENE MENU]
– [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode
– Data registered with [FACE RECOG.]
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
VQT2A61
101
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 102 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking pictures in Custom Mode
You can select one of your own custom settings saved with [CUST. SET MEM.] to suit the
picture-taking conditions.
Initial setting of the Program AE Mode is registered as the custom settings initially.
Set the mode dial to [
].
A Display custom settings
Press [MENU/SET] to display the menu.
A
Press 3/4 to select the custom settings you want
to use.
• Press 1 or the front dial to display the settings for each menu
item. (Press 2 to return to the selection screen.)
• Only some of the menu items are displayed. (Refer to the
following for the menu items that are displayed.)
[AF/AE LOCK]
[PRE AF]
[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]
[Fn BUTTON SET]
[AF+MF]
[FOCUS PRIORITY]
F [AF ASSIST LAMP]
o [AUTO REVIEW]
[LONG SHTR NR]
[SHOOT W/O LENS]
Press [MENU/SET] to enter the settings.
A Saving of the selected custom settings is displayed on the screen.
∫ When changing the menu settings
Even if the menu settings are changed temporarily with [
SET1], [
SET2] or
[
SET3] selected, what has been registered will remain unchanged.
To change what has been registered, overwrite the registered data using [CUST. SET
MEM.] (P101) on the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
Note
• You cannot register the settings of the following menu items as a Custom Mode. If they are
changed, other recording modes will also be affected.
– [CLOCK SET], [TRAVEL DATE], [NO.RESET], [RESET] and [SCENE MENU]
– [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] birthday and name settings in Scene Mode
– Data registered with [FACE RECOG.]
102
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 103 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Recording Motion Picture
This can record full high definition motion pictures compatible with the AVCHD format or
motion pictures recorded in Motion JPEG.
Audio will be recorded in stereo and Dolby Digital Stereo Creator format.
Auto focus and automatic setting of the aperture are available even during the recording of
a motion picture when the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used.
Refer to P15 for information about other lenses.
• Close the flash.
Select the mode.
A Mode dial
B Motion picture button
∫ Modes that can be recorded for motion picture
Item
Settings/Note
ñ Intelligent Auto Mode
The camera will set the most appropriate settings to match
the subject and the recording conditions, so you can leave
the settings to the camera and take motion pictures easily.
(P48)
³/±/´/² Mode
Record motion pictures by automatically setting aperture
and shutter speed.
Creative Motion Picture
Mode
Record motion pictures by manually setting aperture and
shutter speed.
Custom Mode
Record motion pictures with selected Custom Mode
settings.
¿ Scene Mode
Record motion pictures that match the scene being
recorded. (P98 to 100)
[PORTRAIT]
Record motion pictures with [PORTRAIT] setting.
[SCENERY]
Record motion pictures with [SCENERY] setting.
[SPORTS]
Record motion pictures with [SPORTS] setting.
[CLOSE-UP]
This mode allows you to record motion pictures suitable for
[FLOWER], [FOOD] and [OBJECTS] modes and for near
distance recording.
[NIGHT PORTRAIT]
Record clear motion pictures with low light setting inside
dim rooms or at dusk.
My Color Mode
Record motion pictures in My Color Mode setting.
VQT2A61
103
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 104 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
• When recording motion pictures, the focus is continuously adjusted for both [AFS] and
[AFC].
Start recording by pressing the motion
picture button.
A Elapsed recording time
B Available recording time
• Release the motion picture button right after you press
it. Audio will not be recorded for few second after it
starts recording if it is kept pressed.
• The audio is also recorded simultaneously from the
built-in microphone on this unit. (Motion pictures
cannot be recorded without audio.)
•
•
•
•
A C
B
The recording state indicator (red) C will flash while recording motion pictures.
Press the shutter button halfway when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
You can also set the focus manually by rotating the focus mode dial to [MF]. (P80)
Check the battery status and make sure the power is on when using the stereo
microphone (DMW-MS1; optional) (P162).
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.
• If the card becomes full in the middle of recording, the camera stops recording
automatically.
Note
• The flash setting is fixed to [Œ].
• Available recording time is displayed when the [REMAINING DISP.] (P129) in the [CUSTOM
MENU] menu is set to [REMAINING TIME].
• Refer to P185 for information about the available recording time.
• The available recording time displayed on the screen may not decrease regularly.
• Depending on the type of the card, the card access indication may appear for a while after
recording motion pictures. This is not a malfunction.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
• The screen may be blacked out momentarily, or the unit may record noise due to static
electricity or electromagnetic waves etc. depending on the environment of the motion picture
recording.
• When operating the zoom in recording motion pictures, it may take time to come into focus.
• If the Extended Optical Zoom was used before pressing the motion picture button, those
settings will be cleared, so the focus range will change dramatically.
• When the aspect ratio setting is different in still and motion pictures, the angle of view changes
at the start of motion picture recording. When [
REC AREA] (P129) is set to [
], angle of
view during motion picture recording is displayed.
•[
] will operate as [AUTO] while recording a motion picture, and the maximum ISO sensitivity
level becomes [ISO1600].
• In recording motion pictures, [STABILIZER] is fixed to [MODE1].
• In recording motion pictures, the following functions cannot be used.
–[
] and [
] in [AF MODE]
– Direction detection function
– [FACE RECOG.]/[EX. OPT. ZOOM]/[ISO LIMIT SET]/[DIRECT AF AREA]
• It is recommended to use a fully charged battery or AC adaptor when recording motion
pictures.
104
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 105 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• If while recording motion pictures using the AC adaptor the power supply is cut off due to a
power cut or if the AC adaptor is disconnected etc., the motion picture being recorded will not
be recorded.
• When recording fast-moving subjects in the [
] setting, some afterimages or distortion
may be particularly noticeable during playback.
• When you attach the stereo microphone (DMW-MS1; optional), it takes priority over the built-in
microphone. Refer to P162 for the stereo microphone.
Changing [REC MODE] and [REC QUALITY]
Select [REC MODE] from the [MOTION PICTURE]
mode menu, and press 1. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press
[MENU/SET].
Recording format
Effect
[AVCHD]
Select this format to record HD (high definition) video for
playback on your HDTV using an HDMI connection.
[MOTION JPEG]
Select this format to record standard definition video for
playback on your PC. It can be recorded using less
storage when there is not much space left on the memory
card or when you want to attach the motion picture to an
e-mail.
Press 3/4 to select [REC QUALITY] and then
press 1.
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].
VQT2A61
105
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 106 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
When [AVCHD] is selected in step 2
Item
High
quality
Longer
time
Quality (bit rate)¢1
([FHD])
1920k1080 pixels
17 Mbps¢2
([SH])
1280k720 pixels
17 Mbps¢2
([H])
1280k720 pixels
13 Mbps¢2
([L])
1280k720 pixels
9 Mbps¢2
fps
Full high
definition
60i
(Sensor
output is
24 fps)
High
definition
60p
(Sensor
output is
60 fps)
Aspect
ratio
16:9
¢1 What is bit rate
This is the volume of data for definite period of time, and the quality becomes higher
when the number gets bigger. This unit is using the “VBR” recording method. “VBR”
is an abbreviation of “Variable Bit Rate”, and the bit rate (volume of data for definite
period of time) is changed automatically depending on the subject to record.
Therefore, the recording time is shortened when a subject with fast movement is
recorded.
¢2 What is Mbps
This is an abbreviation of “Megabit Per Second”, and it represents the speed of
transmission.
When [MOTION JPEG] is selected in step 2
Item
High
quality
Longer
time
Picture size
([HD])
1280k720 pixels
¢3([WVGA])
848k480 pixels
([VGA])
640k480 pixels
([QVGA])
320k240 pixels
fps
Aspect
ratio
16:9
30
4:3
¢3 This item cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode.
• With the [AVCHD] or [
] for [MOTION JPEG], high quality motion picture can be
enjoyed on the TV by using the HDMI mini cable (optional). For details, see “Playing
back on the TV with HDMI socket” on P147.
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Note
• It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢1 with “Class 6” or higher when
recording motion pictures.
¢1 The SD Speed Class Rating is the speed standard for successive writes.
106
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 107 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• When you set the picture quality to [
], [
] or [
], we recommend using a high-speed card
with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package.
• Motion picture recorded continuously in [MOTION JPEG] is up to 2 GB. Only the maximum
recordable time for 2 GB is displayed on the screen. [AVCHD] can be recorded to the capacity
of the card.¢2
¢2 The recording may stop even if there is more space left in the card depending on the life of
the battery. (P22)
• Recording and deleting repeatedly may cause the recordable time on the card to be reduced.
In this case, format (P38) the card in the unit. Because formatting will delete all data recorded
on the card, save important data beforehand on the computer.
• Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MOTION JPEG] may be played back with poor
picture or sound quality or playback may not be possible even when played back with
equipment compatible with these formats. Also, the recording information may not be
displayed properly. In this case, use this unit.
For details on AVCHD compatible devices, refer to the support sites below.
http://panasonic.co.jp/pavc/global/cs
(This Site is English only.)
• Motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] cannot be played back on the equipment that is not
compatible to the AVCHD (conventional DVD recorder, etc.), so read the instruction manual for
the equipment in use for the action.
• Motion picture recorded in [AVCHD] does not comply with the “DCF/Exif”, so some information
will not display while playback.
• The sound recording specifications on this model have been changed to improve audio
quality. For this reason, some motion pictures recorded in [MOTION JPEG] and pictures
with audio may not be played back with Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX)¢.
(Motion pictures recorded with a Panasonic digital camera (LUMIX) can be played back
on this model.)
¢ Models launched before December 2008, and some models launched in 2009 (FS, LS
series).
[WIND CUT]
Wind noise can be reduced efficiently. Use this when the wind noise is bothersome.
Select [WIND CUT] from the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu, and
press 1. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press [MENU/SET].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the
menu.
Note
• Sound quality will be different than usual when [WIND CUT] is set.
• [WIND CUT] does not function with still pictures with audio or when audio dubbing.
VQT2A61
107
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 108 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Recording Motion Picture with Manual Settings
(
: Creative Motion Picture Mode)
It is possible to manually change the aperture and shutter speed and record motion
pictures. Switching the [EXPOSURE MODE] allows you to use settings such as those
when mode dial is switched to [³], [±], [´] and [²], including changing items that can be
set with the front dial during recording.
Set the mode dial to [
].
Set the focus mode dial to [AFS] or [AFC].
Select [EXPOSURE MODE] from the [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu,
and press 1. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press
[MENU/SET].
Items that can be set
Item
—
Exposure
Compensation
Aperture
Exposure
Compensation
S (Shutter-priority AE Mode)
Shutter speed
Exposure
Compensation
M (Manual Exposure Mode)
Shutter speed
Aperture
P (Program AE Mode)
A (Aperture-priority AE Mode)
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
Rotate the front dial to change setting.
• Items that can be set will switch every time the front
dial is pressed.
Start recording by pressing the motion
picture button.
108
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 109 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Stop the recording by pressing the motion picture button again.
• If the card becomes full in the middle of recording, the camera stops recording
automatically.
∫ Setting the aperture value and shutter speed for each [EXPOSURE MODE]
(When 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is used)
[EXPOSURE MODE]
Aperture value
P
—
A
S
M
F4.0 (Wide)/F5.8 (Tele) to F22
—
F4.0 (Wide)/F5.8 (Tele) to F22
Shutter speed (Sec.)
—
1/30 to 1/4000th
Note
• Aperture value
– Set the aperture value to a higher number when you want a sharp focus background. Set the
aperture value to a lower number when you want a soft focus background.
• Shutter speed
– When you want to take a sharp picture of a fast moving subject, set with a faster shutter
speed. When you want to create a trail effect, set to a slower shutter speed.
– Manually setting a higher shutter speed may increase the noise on-screen due to the higher
sensitivity.
– Color or brightness of the image may change, or you may see horizontal bars on the sides of
the image when the subject is recorded in an extremely bright place or under fluorescent
light, mercury light, sodium light, etc. In this case, record in another recording mode or
manually adjust the shutter speed to 1/60 or 1/100.
• The [AF MODE] is automatically set to [Ø] when you switch the recording mode to Creative
Motion Picture Mode while the [AF MODE] is set to [
].
•[
REC AREA] (P129) is fixed to [
].
• [REMAINING DISP.] (P129) is fixed to [REMAINING TIME].
• It is possible to press the shutter button and record motion pictures.
• You can change the settings and switch settable items even during motion picture recording.
However please note that operating sounds may be recorded.
• Refer to “Recording Motion Picture” on P103 for other settings and operations for recording
motion pictures.
• The sound recording specifications on this model have been changed to improve audio
quality. For this reason, some motion pictures recorded in [MOTION JPEG] and pictures
with audio may not be played back with Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX)¢.
(Motion pictures recorded with a Panasonic digital camera (LUMIX) can be played back
on this model.)
¢ Models launched before December 2008, and some models launched in 2009 (FS, LS
series).
VQT2A61
109
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 110 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Taking a picture with Face Recognition function
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Face Recognition functions
When [AF MODE] is set to [š], the following [FACE RECOG.] functions will work when
[FACE RECOG.] in [REC] mode menu is set to [ON].
• It will search for the face similar to the registered face, setting the
focus and exposure preferentially.
• If a name is set for a registered face, the name is displayed when
the camera detects the registered face.
• The camera will remember the face during the face recognition when
the [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON], and detect the face that
the picture is taken for many times automatically, displaying the face
recognition registration screen.
• It is possible to display the name during playback.
Face settings
Up to 6 face images can be registered together with information such as name and
birthday. It makes the recognition easier by registering multiple images of same person.
∫ Registering from the [REC] mode menu
Press 2 (
) and then press 2/1 to set [AF MODE] to [š].
Select [FACE RECOG.] on the [REC] mode menu and then press 1.
(P30)
Press 3/4 to select [MEMORY] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• A list of registered people is displayed when there are 6 people
already registered. Select the person to be replaced. Information
of the person that was replaced will be deleted.
Take the picture adjusting the face with
the guide.
• The faces of subjects other than people (pets, etc.)
cannot be registered.
• Take a picture of a face from the front.
110
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 111 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press 1.
[NAME]:
It is possible to register names.
For details on how to enter characters,
read the [TITLE EDIT] section on P135.
A
A Face image
Edit screen
[PRIORITY]:
The focus and exposure are preferentially adjusted for
higher-priority faces.
The priority can be changed in following operation.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the priority and then press [MENU/SET].
[AGE]:
Press 2/1 to select the items, and then press 3/4 to set and
then press [MENU/SET].
• Face image can be retaken by selecting A by pressing 2 in the edit screen, and then
pressing [MENU/SET].
Return to step 4 by selecting [YES] with 3, and pressing [MENU/SET].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
∫ Changing information for registered faces
1
2
3
In Step 3 of “Registering from the [REC] mode menu”,
select [SET] and then press [MENU/SET].
Press 3/4 to select [EDIT] and then press [MENU/SET].
Select the face you wish to edit with 3/4/2/1, press
[MENU/SET] and proceed from step 6 in “Registering
from the [REC] mode menu”.
∫ Registering from the automatic registration screen
When the [AUTO REGISTRATION] is set to [ON] in step 2 of the “Changing information for
registered faces”, the registration screen will display automatically after taking the picture
of a face that has high number of appearance.
(Registration screen is displayed after approximately 5 pictures. It is not counted when the
Burst Mode, Auto Bracket, White Balance Bracket, Multi Film Bracket or [AUDIO REC.] is set.)
1
2
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
• Selection screen is displayed again when [NO] is selected, and
when [YES] is selected with 3, [AUTO REGISTRATION] will be
set to [OFF].
Use the operation in Step 6 and following in “Registering
from the [REC] mode menu”.
• Automatic register screen is not displayed when there are 6
people already registered.
VQT2A61
111
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 112 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
∫ Deleting information for registered faces
1 In Step 2 of “Changing information for registered faces”,
select [DELETE] and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3/4/2/1 to select the image of the person to
delete and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
Note
• [FACE RECOG.] only works when [AF MODE] is set to [š].
• Face Recognition may not be possible or may not recognize faces correctly even for registered
faces in the following instances, depending on the facial expression and environment.
– When the face is not facing the camera
– When the face is at an angle
– When the face is extremely bright or dark
– Hidden by sunglasses, glasses reflecting light, hair, hat, etc.
– When the face appears small on the screen
– The entire face is not in the screen
– When distinctive facial features have changed with age
– Facial expression is very different
– When there is little contrast on the faces
– When there is rapid movement
– When the camera is shaking
– When digital zoom is used
• During the Burst Mode, [FACE RECOG.] picture information can be attached to only the first
picture.
• After pressing the shutter button halfway down, a different person’s picture information may be
added when the camera is turned to a different subject to take the photograph.
• When a person who is registered is not recognized, correct by re-registering.
• [FACE RECOG.] cannot be used with the [FOOD] in [CLOSE-UP], [NIGHT SCENERY] and
[ILLUMINATIONS] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT] and in recording motion pictures.
• The data registered with [FACE RECOG.] will be reset when the [REC] menu settings are reset
with [RESET].
• Name registered with [FACE RECOG.] does not display for an image with names set in
[BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] of the Scene Mode, [LOCATION] in travel date, or characters set
in [TITLE EDIT].
• Software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” in the CD-ROM (supplied) allows to check
information of up to 3 people registered in one picture.
112
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 113 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC] mode:
Useful Functions at Travel Destinations
Recording which Day of the Vacation You Take the Picture
For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P30.
If you set the departure date or the travel destination of the vacation in advance, the
number of days that have passed since the departure date (which day of the vacation it is)
is recorded when you take the picture. You can display the number of days that have
passed when playing back the pictures and stamp it on the recorded pictures with [TEXT
STAMP] (P136).
• The number of days that have passed since the departure date can be printed out using the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied).
• Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P28)
Select [TRAVEL DATE] from the [SETUP] menu,
and then press 1.
Press 3 to select [TRAVEL SETUP] and then press
1.
Press 4 to select [SET] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press 3/4/2/1 to set the departure date
(year/month/day), and then press [MENU/SET].
Press 3/4/2/1 to set the return date (year/
month/day), and then press [MENU/SET].
• If you do not want to set the return date, press [MENU/SET]
while the date bar is displayed.
VQT2A61
113
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 114 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Press 4 to select [LOCATION] and then press 1.
Press 4 to select [SET] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Enter the location.
• For details on how to enter characters, read the [TITLE EDIT] section on P135.
Press [MENU/SET] twice to close the menu.
Take a picture.
• The number of days that have passed since the departure date is displayed for about
5 seconds if this unit is turned on etc. after setting the travel date or when the travel date
is set.
• When the travel date is set, [—] appears on the lower right of the screen.
∫ Canceling the travel date
The travel date is automatically canceled if the current date is after the return date. If you
want to cancel the travel date before the end of the vacation, select [OFF] on the screen
shown in step 3 or 7 and then press [MENU/SET] twice. If the [TRAVEL SETUP] is set to
[OFF] in step 3, [LOCATION] will be also set to [OFF].
Note
• The travel date is calculated using the date in the clock setting and the departure date you set.
If you set [WORLD TIME] (P115) to the travel destination, the travel date is calculated using the
date in the clock setting and the travel destination setting.
• The travel date setting is memorized even if the camera is turned off.
• If [TRAVEL DATE] is set to [OFF], the number of days that have passed since the departure
date will not be recorded even if you set the travel date or the return date. Even if
[TRAVEL DATE] is set to [SET] after taking the pictures, which day of the vacation you took
them is not displayed.
• If you set a departure date and then take a picture on a date before this departure date, [-]
(minus) is displayed in orange and the day of the vacation that you took the picture is not
recorded.
• If the travel date is displayed as [-] (minus) in white, there is a time difference that involves date
change between the [HOME] and [DESTINATION]. (It will be recorded)
• The text set as [LOCATION] can be edited later with [TITLE EDIT].
• The name for [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode will not be recorded when
[LOCATION] is set.
• [TRAVEL DATE] cannot be recorded when taking motion pictures.
• [TRAVEL DATE] cannot be set in the Intelligent Auto Mode. Setting of other recording mode will
be reflected.
114
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 115 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Recording Dates/Times at Overseas Travel Destinations (World Time)
For details on the [SETUP] menu settings, refer to P30.
You can display the local times at the travel destinations and record them on the pictures
you take.
• Select [CLOCK SET] to set the current date and time in advance. (P28)
Select [WORLD TIME] from the [SETUP] menu,
and then press 1.
• When first using the camera after purchasing it, the [PLEASE
SET THE HOME AREA] message appears. Press
[MENU/SET], and set the home area on the screen in step 3.
Press 4 to select [HOME], and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press 2/1 to select the home area, and then
press [MENU/SET].
A
A Current time
B Time difference from GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
B
• If daylight saving time [
] is used at the home area,
press 3. Press 3 again to return to the original time.
• The daylight saving time setting for the home area does not
advance the current time. Advance the clock setting by one
hour.
Press 3 to select [DESTINATION] and then
press [MENU/SET] to set.
C Depending on the setting, the time at the travel destination C
area or the home area is displayed.
D
Press 2/1 to select the area the travel
destination is in and then press [MENU/SET] to
set.
D Current time of the destination area
E Time difference
• If daylight saving time [
] is used at the travel
destination, press 3. (The time advances by one hour.)
Press 3 again to return to the original time.
E
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
VQT2A61
115
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 116 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• Return the setting to [HOME] when the vacation is finished by performing steps 1, 2 and 3.
• If [HOME] is already set, change only the travel destination, and use.
• If you cannot find the travel destination in the areas displayed on the screen, set by the time
difference from the home area.
• Except for the motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD], the pictures recorded at travel destination
will display [“] on the screen when played back.
Using the [REC] Mode Menu
• [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to both the [REC]
mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu. Changing these settings in one of these
menus is reflected in other menu.
? [ASPECT RATIO]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback
method.
Applicable modes:
[X]:
[ASPECT RATIO] of a 4:3 TV
[Y]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a 35 mm film camera
[W]: [ASPECT RATIO] of a high-definition TV, etc.
[
]:
Square aspect ratio
[X]
[Y]
[W]
[
]
Note
• The ends of the recorded pictures may be cut at printing so check before printing. (P179)
116
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 117 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
@ [PICTURE SIZE]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Set the number of pixels. The higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the detail of the
pictures will appear even when they are printed onto large sheets.
Applicable modes:
∫ When the aspect ratio is [X].
4000k3000 pixels (12 million pixels)
2816k2112 pixels (5.9 million pixels)
2048k1536 pixels (3.1 million pixels)
∫ When the aspect ratio is [Y].
4128k2752 pixels (11.4 million pixels)
2928k1952 pixels (5.7 million pixels)
2064k1376 pixels (2.8 million pixels)
∫ When the aspect ratio is [W].
4352k2448 pixels (10.7 million pixels)
3072k1728 pixels (5.3 million pixels)
1920k1080 pixels (2.1 million pixels)
∫ When the aspect ratio is [
].
2992k2992 pixels (9.0 million pixels)
2112k2112 pixels (4.5 million pixels)
1504k1504 pixels (2.3 million pixels)
Note
• If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P121) to [ON], [ ] is
displayed on the screen when the picture size is set to a size
other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio.
“EZ” is an abbreviation of “Extended optical Zoom”.
• A digital picture is made of numerous dots called pixels. The
higher the numbers of pixels, the finer the picture will be
when it is printed on a large piece of paper or displayed on a
PC monitor.
A Many pixels (Fine)
B Few pixels (Rough)
¢ These pictures are examples to show the effect.
• If you change the aspect ratio, set the picture size again.
• Refer to P181 for information about the number of recordable pictures.
VQT2A61
117
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 118 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
A [QUALITY]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Set the compression rate at which the pictures are to be stored.
Applicable modes:
[A]:
Fine (when giving priority to the picture quality)
[›]:
Standard (when using the standard picture quality and increasing the number of
pictures to be recorded without changing the number of pixels)
[
]: RAWiFine (In addition to the [RAW] settings, a fine-equivalent JPEG image is
simultaneously created.)¢1
[
]: RAWiStandard (In addition to the [RAW] settings, a standard-equivalent JPEG
image is simultaneously created.)¢1
[
]:
RAW file (When the image is to be edited with a PC in high quality)¢2
¢1 If you delete a RAW file from the camera, the corresponding JPEG image will also be
deleted.
¢2 It is fixed to maximum recordable pixels ([L]) for each image aspect ratio.
Note
• Refer to P181 for information about the number of recordable pictures.
• You can enjoy more advanced picture editing if you use RAW files. You can save RAW files in a
file format (JPEG, TIFF etc.) that can be displayed on your PC etc., develop them and edit them
using the software “SILKYPIX Developer Studio” by Ichikawa Soft Laboratory on the CD-ROM
(supplied).
•[
] images are recorded with a smaller data volume than [
] or [
].
• [PRINT SET] and [FAVORITE] cannot be set to a picture taken by [
].
[FACE RECOG.]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Specify a person’s face and use the face recognition functions.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[ON]/[MEMORY]/[SET]
Note
• Refer to P110 for details.
118
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 119 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
C [METERING MODE]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Type of optical measurement to measure brightness can be changed.
Applicable modes:
[C]:
Multiple
This is the method in which the camera measures the most
suitable exposure by judging the allocation of brightness on the
whole screen automatically. Usually, we recommend using this
method.
[
]:
Center weighted
This is the method used to focus on the subject on the center
of the screen and measure the whole screen evenly.
[Ù]:
Spot
This is the method to measure the subject in the spot metering
target A.
Note
• When the AF mode is set to [š] while [C] is selected, exposure is adjusted to the face of a
person, and when it is set to [
], exposure is adjusted to the locked subject.
[STABILIZER]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Using one of these modes, jitter during picture taking is detected, and the camera
automatically compensates the jitter, enabling jitter-free images to be taken.
Check that the [O.I.S.] switch on the lens is set to [ON].
Applicable modes:
[MODE1]:
Jitter is always compensated during [REC] mode.
[MODE2]:
The jitter is compensated for when the shutter button is pressed.
[MODE3]:
Camera shake is corrected for up/down movements. This mode is ideal for
panning (a method of taking pictures which involves turning the camera to
track the movements of a subject which continues to move in a fixed
direction).
Note
• The stabilizer function may not be effective in the following cases.
– When there is a lot of jitter.
– When the zoom magnification is high.
– When using the digital zoom.
– When taking pictures while following a moving subject.
– When the shutter speed becomes slower to take pictures indoors or in dark places.
VQT2A61
119
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 120 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• Be careful of camera jitter when you press the shutter button.
• The panning effect in [MODE3] is more difficult to achieve in the following cases.
– In brightly lit places such as in broad daylight on a summer’s day
– When the shutter speed is faster than 1/100th of a second.
– When you move the camera too slowly because the subject is moving slowly. (The
background will not become a blur.)
– When the camera does not keep up with the subject satisfactorily
• We recommend taking pictures with the Viewfinder when panning in [MODE3].
• [STABILIZER] cannot be selected when a lens without stabilizer function is used.
• The setting is fixed to [MODE1] in recording motion pictures.
[FLASH]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can switch the flash setting.
Applicable modes:
[‡]/[
]/[‰]/[
]/[
]/[
]
Note
• Refer to P65 for details.
[D.RED-EYE]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
When the flash is used with the Red-eye reduction ([
], [
automatically detect and correct the red-eye in the image data.
], [
]) selected, it will
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[ON]
Note
• It may not be able to correct the red-eye depending on the recording conditions. It may also
correct objects other than red-eye.
[FLASH SYNCHRO]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can set to the 2nd curtain synchro.
Applicable modes:
[1ST]/[2ND]
Note
• Refer to P70 for details.
120
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 121 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[FLASH ADJUST.]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can adjust the flash output.
Applicable modes:
[s2 EV]/[s1 2/3 EV]/[s1 1/3 EV]/[s1 EV]/[s2/3 EV]/[s1/3 EV]/[0 EV]/[r1/3 EV]/
[r2/3 EV]/[r1 EV]/[r1 1/3 EV]/[r1 2/3 EV]/[r2 EV]
Note
• Refer to P69 for details.
[I.EXPOSURE] (Intelligent exposure adjustment)
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Contrast and exposure will be adjusted automatically when there is a big difference in
brightness between the background and subject, to bring the image close to how you see.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH]
Note
• Even when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [ISO100]/[ISO125], [SENSITIVITY] may be set higher
than [ISO100]/[ISO125] if the picture is taken with [I.EXPOSURE] set to valid.
• Compensation effect may not be achieved depending on the conditions.
•[
] in the screen turns to yellow when [I.EXPOSURE] is in effect.
• [LOW], [STANDARD], or [HIGH] represents the maximum range of effect.
[EX. OPT. ZOOM]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Enlarging a picture with no picture quality deterioration
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[ON]
Note
• Refer to P55 for details.
) [DIGITAL ZOOM]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This can enlarge subjects even more than the optical zoom or Extended Optical Zoom.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[2t]/[4t]
Note
• Refer to P55 for details.
• If camera shake (jitter) is a problem during zooming, it is recommended that [STABILIZER] be
set to [MODE1].
VQT2A61
121
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 122 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[BURST RATE]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can set the burst speed.
Applicable modes:
[H]/[L]
Note
• Refer to P72 for details.
[AUTO BRACKET]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can set the compensation range of the exposure and the bracket order.
Applicable modes:
[STEP]:
[3•1/3]/[3•2/3]/[5•1/3]/[5•2/3]/[7•1/3]/[7•2/3]
[SEQUENCE]: [0/j/i]/[j/0/i]
Note
• Refer to P74 for details.
[SELF-TIMER]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
You can set the time for the self-timer.
Applicable modes:
[
]/[
]/[
]
Note
• Refer to P76 for details.
[COLOR SPACE]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Set this when you want to correct the color reproduction of the recorded pictures on a PC,
printer etc.
Applicable modes:
[sRGB]:
Color space is set to sRGB color space.
This is widely used in computer related equipment.
[AdobeRGB]: Color space is set to AdobeRGB color space.
AdobeRGB is mainly used for business purposes such as professional
printing because it has a greater range of reproducible colors than sRGB.
122
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 123 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• Depending on the color space setting, the file name of the recorded picture changes as shown.
P1000001.JPG
P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
• Set to sRGB if you are not very familiar with AdobeRGB.
• The setting is fixed to [sRGB] in recording motion pictures.
[LONG SHTR NR]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
The camera automatically removes noise that appears when the shutter speed becomes
slower to take pictures of night scenery etc. so you can take beautiful pictures.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[ON]
Note
• If you set [ON], the countdown screen is displayed when the shutter button is pressed. Do not
move the camera at this time. After the countdown is finished, [PLEASE WAIT...] is displayed
for the same time as the selected shutter speed for signal processing.
• We recommend using a tripod when the shutter speed is slowed to take pictures.
• This does not operate during motion picture recording.
[ISO LIMIT SET]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
It will select optimal ISO sensitivity with set value as limit depending on the brightness of
the subject.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]
Note
• The upper limit of the ISO sensitivity can be set.
• The higher the value set for the ISO sensitivity, the more the jitter is reduced but the greater the
amount of picture noise.
• It will work when the [SENSITIVITY] is set to [AUTO] or [
].
[ISO INCREMENTS]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
ISO sensitivity settings between [ISO100] and [ISO3200] are changed for every 1/3 EV.
Applicable modes:
[1/3 EV]:
[100]/[125]/[160]/[200]/[250]/[320]/[400]/[500]/[640]/[800]/[1000]/[1250]/
[1600]/[2000]/[2500]/[3200]
[1 EV]:
[100]/[200]/[400]/[800]/[1600]/[3200]
VQT2A61
123
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 124 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
Note
• When the setting is changed from [1/3 EV] to [1 EV], ISO sensitivity will be set to value closest
to the value set during the [1/3 EV]. (Set value will not restore when the setting is changed back
to [1/3 EV]. It will stay as the setting selected for [1 EV].)
B [AUDIO REC.]
For details on [REC] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
Audio can be recorded simultaneously with the image. You can record the conversation
during the shooting or the situation as a memo.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]:
Audio will not be recorded.
[ON]:
[B] is displayed on the screen.
Audio will be recorded as soon as the image is recorded.
(It will stop in 5 seconds)
• If you press [MENU/SET] during audio recording, the audio recording is canceled.
Note
• Audio is recorded from the built-in microphone on the camera.
• Audio recorded with this unit may not playback on other equipment.
• The sound recording specifications on this model have been changed to improve audio
quality. For this reason, some motion pictures recorded in [MOTION JPEG] and pictures
with audio may not be played back with Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX)¢.
¢ Models launched before December 2008, and some models launched in 2009 (FS, LS
series).
• [AUDIO REC.] cannot be set in the following cases.
– When recording with Auto Bracket
– During burst shooting
– When recording with White Balance Bracket
– When recording with Multi Film Bracket
– When [QUALITY] is set to [
], [
] or [
]
Using the [MOTION PICTURE] Mode Menu
• [METERING MODE], [I.EXPOSURE], and [DIGITAL ZOOM] are common to both the [REC]
mode menu and [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu. Changing these settings in one of these
menus is reflected in other menu.
– For details, refer to the explanation for the corresponding setting in [REC] mode menu.
[REC MODE]
For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This sets up the data format of motion pictures.
Applicable modes:
[
[AVCHD]]/[
[MOTION JPEG]]
Note
• Refer to P105 for details.
124
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 125 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[REC QUALITY]
For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This sets up the picture quality of motion pictures.
Applicable modes:
∫ When [REC MODE] is [
[FHD]/[SH]/[H]/[L]
[AVCHD]].
∫ When [REC MODE] is [
[MOTION JPEG]].
[HD]/[WVGA]/[VGA]/[QVGA]
Note
• Refer to P105 for details.
[EXPOSURE MODE]
For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This changes the setup in Creative Motion Picture Mode.
Applicable modes:
[P]/[A]/[S]/[M]
Note
• Refer to P108 for details.
[WIND CUT]
For details on [MOTION PICTURE] mode menu settings, refer to P30.
This reduces the wind noise in the audio recording.
Applicable modes:
[OFF]/[LOW]/[STANDARD]/[HIGH]
Note
• Refer to P107 for details.
Perform these settings if you need to.
Using the [CUSTOM MENU]
• In the Intelligent Auto Mode, only [CUST. SET MEM.], [LCD INFO.DISP.], [GUIDE LINE] and
[REMAINING DISP.] can be set.
For details on how to select the [CUSTOM MENU] menu settings, refer to P30.
[CUST. SET MEM.]
Up to 3 current camera settings can be registered as custom
settings.
• Refer to P102 for details.
VQT2A61
125
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 126 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
This will set the display style of the viewfinder.
[LVF DISP.STYLE]
[
]:
Viewfinder style
[
]:
LCD monitor style
• Refer to P62 for details.
This will set the display style of the LCD monitor.
[LCD DISP.STYLE]
[
]:
Viewfinder style
[
]:
LCD monitor style
• Refer to P61 for details.
This will set the color of the information display screen on the
LCD monitor. (P61)
[OFF]
[LCD INFO.DISP.]
[LVF/LCD AUTO]
[
]:
Brown colors
[
]:
Red colors
[
]:
Black colors
It will switch automatically to viewfinder display when an eye or
object gets near the viewfinder using an eye sensor. It will return
to LCD monitor display when it goes away.
[OFF]/[ON]
• LCD monitor display and viewfinder display can be switched manually by pressing [LVF/LCD].
(P41)
This allows you to set either to display or not display the
histogram. (P64)
[HISTOGRAM]
[OFF]
[ON]:
Position of the histogram can be set. Refer to P64 on
how to set.
This will set the pattern of guide lines displayed when taking a picture.
(P63)
[GUIDE LINE]
126
VQT2A61
[OFF]/[
]/[
[
Position of the guide line can be set. Refer to P63 for
how to set.
]:
]
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 127 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
This will set what will be fixed by the [AF/AE LOCK] button when
taking a picture with fixed focus or exposure.
[AF/AE LOCK]
[AE]:
Only the exposure is locked.
[AF]:
Only the focus is locked.
[AF/AE]: Both focus and exposure are locked.
• Refer to P81 for details.
This will set the operation of [AF/AE LOCK] button when taking a
picture with fixed focus or exposure.
[OFF]:
The focus and the exposure are fixed only while you
are pressing [AF/AE LOCK]. (P81)
If you release [AF/AE LOCK], AF/AE Lock is canceled.
[ON]:
The focus and the exposure remain fixed even if you
release [AF/AE LOCK] after pressing it.
If you press [AF/AE LOCK] again, AF/AE Lock is
canceled.
[AF/AE LOCK HOLD]
This will set the operation of the [
preview screen.
] button when displaying the
[OFF]:
Preview screen is displayed only when the [
] is
pressed.
It will return to previous screen when [
] is released.
[ON]:
Preview screen is displayed even after the [
] is
released after pressing. (P93)
It will return to previous screen when [
] is pressed
again.
[PREVIEW HOLD]
Depending on the setting, camera will adjust the focus
automatically before pressing the shutter button halfway.
[PRE AF]
[OFF]
[
]: Quick AF
[
]: Continuous AF
About [ ] and [ ]
[ ] will adjust the focus automatically when the jitter of the camera gets small. [ ] will
adjust the focus at all times (continuous AF operation).
The camera will adjust the focus automatically, and the focus adjustment when the shutter
button is pressed becomes faster. It is effective when you do not want to miss the photo
opportunity.
Note
• The battery will be consumed faster than usual.
• Press the shutter button halfway again when it is difficult to focus on the subject.
• When [PRE AF] is set to [
], it may take time to focus on the subject if you rotate the zoom
ring from Wide to Tele or suddenly change the subject from a distant one to a nearby one.
• [PRE AF] does not work during the Preview Mode.
VQT2A61
127
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 128 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
• [PRE AF] function does not work with lenses without the AF function. Also, [
used when a compatible lens (P15) is used.
] can only be
Position and size of the AF area can be modified easily during
recording.
[DIRECT AF AREA]
[OFF]
[ON]:
AF area can be moved freely with 3/4/2/1 when
[Ø] is selected.
• Refer to P79 for details.
It will set so no picture can be taken when it is out of focus.
[OFF]:
This gives priority to the best time to take a picture so
you can take a picture when the shutter button is
pressed fully.
[ON]:
You cannot take a picture until the subject is brought
into focus.
[FOCUS PRIORITY]
• If you set [OFF], be careful as the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in
focus mode is set.
• This does not operate during motion picture recording.
Illuminating the subject makes it easier for the camera to focus
when recording in low light conditions that make focusing difficult.
[AF ASSIST LAMP]
[OFF]:
The AF assist lamp does not turn on.
[ON]:
When taking pictures in dark places, the AF assist
lamp lights while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(Larger AF areas are now displayed.)
• The effective range of the AF assist lamp is different depending on used lens.
– When 14 – 140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K is attached and at Wide: Approx.
1.0 m (3.28 feet) to 3.0 m (9.84 feet)
• When you do not want to use the AF assist lamp (e.g. when taking pictures of animals in dark
places), set the [AF ASSIST LAMP] to [OFF]. In this case, it will become more difficult to focus
on the subject.
• Remove the lens hood.
• When you use a lens with a large filter diameter that obscures the AF assist lamp, shadows
may appear on the picture and the performance of the camera may deteriorate.
• The setting for the [AF ASSIST LAMP] is fixed to [OFF] in [SCENERY] mode,
[NIGHT SCENERY] or [CREATIVE NIGHT SCENERY] in [NIGHT PORTRAIT] mode, and
[SUNSET] in Scene Mode.
It is possible to adjust focus manually after it was adjusted
automatically.
[OFF]
[AF+MF]
[ON]:
It is possible to finely adjust the focus manually by
rotating the focus ring while AF lock (focus mode is set
to [AFS] and shutter button is half-way pressed, or AF
lock with [AF/AE LOCK]).
• This does not operate during motion picture recording.
128
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 129 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
In Manual Focus, the assistance screen appears on the screen to
facilitate focusing on the subject.
[OFF]
[MF ASSIST]
[ON]:
Center of the screen will be enlarged automatically
when the focus ring is rotated.
• Refer to P80 for details.
Change the method of Exposure Compensation setting switching
when the mode dial is set to
,
,
and
.
[SWITCH BY PRESSING THE FRONT DIAL]:
[EXPO. SETTINGS]
Press the front dial to switch between Exposure Compensation,
Program Shift, aperture setting, and shutter speed setting.
[SWITCH BY PRESSING THE LVF/LCD BUTTON]:
Press [LVF/LCD] to switch between Exposure Compensation,
Program Shift, aperture setting, and shutter speed setting.
• Switchable setting items differ depending on the [REC] mode.
• You cannot switch between LCD monitor and viewfinder by pressing [LVF/LCD] when it is set to
[SWITCH BY PRESSING THE LVF/LCD BUTTON].
• [EXPO. SETTINGS] is disabled when you set [LVF/LCD AUTO] to [OFF].
Setting items for each [REC] mode
or
LVF/LCD
³
Program Shift
Exposure Compensation
±
Aperture
Exposure Compensation
´
Shutter speed
Exposure Compensation
²
Shutter speed
Aperture
[
REC AREA]
This changes the angle of view during motion picture recording
and still picture recording.
[!] (Picture)/[
] (Motion picture)
• The recording area indicated is a guide line.
This will switch display between the number of recordable
pictures and available recording time.
[REMAINING DISP.]
[REMAINING SHOTS]:
This will display the number of recordable pictures for still
pictures.
[REMAINING TIME]:
This will display the available recording time for motion pictures.
VQT2A61
129
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 130 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Recording pictures)
[
BUTTON]
[DIAL GUIDE]
Enables/disables the motion picture button.
[OFF]/[ON]
Sets if the operation switch guide when the mode dial is switched
to
,
,
and
is to be displayed or not.
[OFF]/[ON]
• It will display dial operation guide to the screen that is possible to
perform Exposure Compensation, Program Shift, aperture setting, or
shutter speed setting when set to [ON].
A Dial operation guide
A
[MENU RESUME]
The last operated menu position is saved even if the camera is
turned off.
[OFF]/[ON]
[PIXEL REFRESH]
It will perform optimization of imaging device and image
processing.
• Imaging device and image processing is optimized when the camera is purchased, and it
needs to be optimized annually after the purchase.
• Turn the camera off and on after the pixels are corrected.
[SENSOR CLEANING]
Dust reduction to blow off the debris and dust that have affixed to
the front of the imaging device is performed.
• Dust reduction function will operate automatically when the camera is turned on, but you can
use this function when you see dust. (P167)
It is possible to setup so the shutter will not operate when there is
no lens on the unit.
[SHOOT W/O LENS]
130
VQT2A61
[OFF]:
You cannot press the shutter button when a lens is not
attached to the camera body or is not attached
correctly.
[ON]:
Shutter will operate regardless of the lens on the unit.
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 131 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Advanced (Playback)
Playing Back Motion Pictures/Pictures with Audio
• This unit was designed to play motion pictures and still pictures with audio using the QuickTime
Motion JPEG and AVCHD formats that were taken with this model (only).
• Motion pictures in AVCHD format that can be played back on this unit are [AVCHD] motion
pictures that were recorded with this unit, AVCHD format (including [AVCHD Lite]) motion
pictures recorded with Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX) only.
Press [(].
Motion pictures
Press 2/1 to select a picture with a
motion picture icon (such as [ ]),
and then press 3 to play back.
[AVCHD]
A
[MOTION JPEG]
B
A
B
A Motion picture icon
B The motion picture recording time
• After playback starts, the elapsed playback
time is displayed on the upper right of the
screen.
For example, 8 minutes and 30 seconds is
displayed as [8m30s].
• Some information (recording information, etc.) is not displayed for motion pictures recorded in
[AVCHD].
∫ Operations performed during motion picture playback
The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1.
A
B
C
D
¢
Play/Pause
Stop
Fast rewind, Frame-by-frame rewind¢
Fast forward, Frame-by-frame forward¢
These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode.
E Reduce volume level
F Increase volume level
Note
• Please note that the bundled software includes QuickTime or “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD
Edition” to play back motion picture files created with the camera on the PC.
• QuickTime Motion JPEG motion pictures that were recorded with a PC or other equipment may
have lower image quality or may not be able to play back with this unit.
VQT2A61
131
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 132 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Pictures with audio
Press 2/1 to select a picture with the audio icon [
and then press 3 to play back.
]
A
A Audio icon
• Refer to [AUDIO REC.] (P124) and [AUDIO DUB.] (P144) for
information about how to create still pictures with audio.
Note
• Sound can be heard through the speaker. Refer to [VOLUME] (P35) for information about how
to adjust the volume in the [SETUP] menu.
• Pictures with audio recorded with other equipment may not playback on this unit.
• When using a high capacity card, it is possible that fast rewinding may be slower than usual.
Using the [PLAYBACK] mode menu
You can use various functions in playback mode to rotate pictures, set protection for them
etc.
• With [TEXT STAMP], [RESIZE], [TRIMMING] or [ASPECT CONV.], a new edited picture is
created. A new picture cannot be created if there is no free space on the card so we
recommend checking that there is free space and then editing the picture.
[SLIDE SHOW]
You can create a slide show and add music to enhance the presentation. In addition the
pictures will play with a fixed interval between each of the picture that you select. You can
select to play, only still pictures, only motion pictures, designated “favorite” pictures, or
pictures registered with face recognition as a slide show.
To best enjoy this feature it’s recommended that you connect your digital camera to your
TV set.
Select [SLIDE SHOW] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press
[MENU/SET].
• [FAVORITE] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on the
[PLAYBACK] menu (P134) is at [ON] and there are pictures
already set as favorites.
132
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 133 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Press 3 to select [START] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press 4 to finish the slide show.
• Normal playback resumes after the slide show finishes.
∫ Operations performed during slide show
The cursor displayed during playback is the same as 3/4/2/1.
• The menu screen is restored when [‚] is pressed.
A
B
C
D
¢
Play/Pause
Stop
Back to previous picture¢
Ahead to next picture¢
These operations can be performed only in the Pause Mode or
during motion picture playback.
E Reduce volume level
F Increase volume level
∫ Changing the slide show settings
You can change the settings for slide show playback by selecting
[EFFECT] or [SETUP] on the slide show menu screen.
[EFFECT]
This allows you to select the screen effects when switching from
one picture to the next.
[NATURAL], [SWING], [URBAN], [OFF]
• When [URBAN] has been selected, the picture may appear in black and white as a screen
effect.
• [EFFECT] is set to [OFF] when playing a slide show with motion pictures only.
[SETUP]
[DURATION] or [REPEAT] can be set.
Item
Settings
[DURATION]
1SEC./2SEC./3SEC./5SEC.
[REPEAT]
ON/OFF
[MUSIC]
ON/OFF
[AUDIO]
ON/OFF
• [DURATION] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [EFFECT] setting.
• [AUDIO] can be set only when [OFF] has been selected as the [MUSIC] setting. Audio will be
played along with the still picture with audio or audio of the motion picture by setting the
[AUDIO] to [ON].
Note
• Music effects cannot be played back simultaneously with motion pictures or still pictures with
audio.
• It is not possible to add new music effects.
VQT2A61
133
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 134 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
[PLAYBACK MODE]
Playback in [NORMAL PLAY], [PICTURE PLAY], [AVCHD PLAY], [MOTION JPEG PLAY],
[FACE RECOG. PLAY] or [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected.
Select [PLAYBACK MODE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the item and then press
[MENU/SET].
• [FAVORITE PLAY] can be selected only when [FAVORITE] on
the [PLAYBACK] menu (P134) is at [ON] and there are pictures
already set as favorites.
• Refer to P56 for information about how to play back pictures.
Ü [FAVORITE]
You can do the following if a mark has been added to pictures and they have been set as
favorites.
• Play back the pictures set as favorites only as a slide show.
• Play back only the pictures set as favorites. ([FAVORITE PLAY])
• Delete all the pictures not set as favorites. ([ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ])
Select [FAVORITE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 4 to select [ON] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• You cannot set pictures as favorites if [FAVORITE] is set to
[OFF]. Also [Ü] will not appear when [FAVORITE] is set to [OFF]
even if it was previously set to [ON].
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press 4
to set it during playback.
• Repeat the above procedure.
• If 4 is pressed again, the favorite setting is canceled.
∫ Canceling all the [FAVORITE] settings
1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set as a favorite.
Note
• You can set up to 999 pictures as favorites.
• When printing pictures at a photo printing store, [ALL DELETE EXCEPTÜ] (P60) is useful so
only the pictures you want to be printed remain on the card.
134
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 135 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
• You may not be able to set pictures taken with other equipment as favorites.
• The motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] and pictures that were taken with the [QUALITY] set
to [
] cannot be set to [FAVORITE].
• You can perform, check and cancel the settings of images as favorites using the
“PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied).
[TITLE EDIT]
You can add text (comments) to pictures. After text has been registered, it can be included
in prints using [TEXT STAMP] (P136). (Only alphabetic characters and symbols can be
entered.)
Names set in [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode or [LOCATION] in travel date
are also recorded as the titles.
Select [TITLE EDIT] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then
press [MENU/SET].
[SINGLE]
[MULTI]
Select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set.
• [’] is displayed for pictures with titles
already registered.
[MULTI] setting
Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and
Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to
then press [MENU/SET] to set.
the picture.
select the pictures.
• The setting is canceled when [DISPLAY] is pressed again.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select text and then press
[MENU/SET] to register.
• Press [DISPLAY] to switch text between [A] (capitals), [a]
(small case) and [&/1] (special characters and numbers).
• The entry position cursor can be moved left and right with the
front dial.
• To enter a blank, move the cursor to [SPACE] or to delete an entered character, move
the cursor to [DELETE], and press [MENU/SET].
• To stop editing at any time during text entry, press [‚].
• A maximum of 30 characters can be entered. (Maximum of 9 characters when setting
names in [FACE RECOG.])
Press 3/4/2/1 to move the cursor to [EXIT] and then press
[MENU/SET] to end text input.
VQT2A61
135
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 136 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢
¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
∫ Delete the title
[SINGLE] setting
1 In step 4, delete all the texts, select [EXIT], and press [MENU/SET].
2 Press [‚].
3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
[MULTI] setting
1 In step 4, delete all the texts, select [EXIT], and press [MENU/SET].
2 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Note
• Text can be scrolled if all of the registered text does not fit on the screen.
• The name setting of [FACE RECOG.] or [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] in Scene Mode or
[LOCATION] in travel date can also be registered by using the operation in steps 4 and
following.
• The name setting of [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET] in Scene Mode, [LOCATION] in travel date and
[TITLE EDIT] cannot be registered at the same time.
• You can print out texts (comments) using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” bundled
software on the CD-ROM (supplied).
• You can set up to 50 pictures at one time with [MULTI].
• You cannot use title edit for the following pictures.
– Motion pictures
– Protected pictures
– Pictures taken with [
], [
] or [
]
– Pictures recorded with other equipment
[TEXT STAMP]
You can stamp the recording date/time, age, travel date or title onto the recorded pictures.
It is suitable for regular size printing. (Pictures with a picture size larger than [
], [
],
[
], or [ ] will be resized when stamping the date etc. on them.)
Select [TEXT STAMP] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then
press [MENU/SET].
136
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 137 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
[SINGLE]
[MULTI]
Select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET] to set.
• [‘] appears on screen if the picture is
stamped with text.
[MULTI] setting
Press [DISPLAY] to set (repeat), and
Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to
then press [MENU/SET] to set.
the picture.
select the pictures.
• The setting is canceled when
[DISPLAY] is pressed again.
Press 3/4/2/1 to select [SHOOTING DATE], [AGE], [TRAVEL DATE]
or [TITLE] and then press [MENU/SET] to set each item.
[SHOOTING DATE]
[W/OTIME]:
Stamp the year, month and date.
[WITHTIME]:
Stamp the year, month, day, hour and minutes.
[AGE] (P99)
If this is set to [ON], [AGE] is stamped on the pictures.
[TRAVEL DATE]
If this is set to [ON], [TRAVEL DATE] is stamped on the pictures.
[TITLE]
Text is printed together with the image for pictures that have already been recorded
with text in [FACE RECOG.] or [BABY1]/[BABY2] and [PET] name settings in Scene
Mode, [LOCATION] in travel date or [TITLE EDIT].
Press [MENU/SET].
• If you set [TEXT STAMP] for a picture with a picture size larger than [
[
], or [ ], the picture size will become smaller as shown below.
Aspect ratio setting
], [
],
Picture size
>
X
/
Y
/
>
W
/
>
/
>
• The picture becomes slightly rougher.
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The message [SAVE NEW PICTURES?] appears if the picture
was recorded with a picture size [
], [
], [
], or [ ].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢
¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is selected.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
VQT2A61
137
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 138 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Note
• When you print pictures stamped with text, the date will be printed over the stamped text if you
specify printing of the date at the photo shop or on the printer.
• You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI].
• Depending on the printer being used, some characters may be cut at printing. Check before
printing.
• Text and dates cannot be stamped on the pictures in the following cases.
– Motion pictures
– Pictures with audio
– Pictures recorded without setting the clock and title
– Pictures that were previously stamped with [TEXT STAMP]
– Pictures taken with [
], [
] or [
]
– Pictures recorded with other equipment
Q [RESIZE] Reducing the picture size (number of pixels)
We recommend resizing to [
], [
], [
], or [ ], if you want to attach a picture to
an e-mail or use it on a website. (Pictures set to the minimum number of pixels for
[ASPECT RATIO] cannot be further reduced in size.)
Select [RESIZE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then
press [MENU/SET].
Select the picture and size.
1
2
[SINGLE] setting
Press 2/1 to select the picture, and
then press [MENU/SET].
Press 2/1 to select the size¢, and
then press [MENU/SET].
[SINGLE]
¢ Only the sizes to which the pictures can be
resized is displayed.
1
2
[MULTI] setting
Press 3/4 to select the size, and then
press [MENU/SET].
Press 3/4/2/1 to select the picture,
and then press [DISPLAY].
• Repeat this step for each picture, and
press [MENU/SET] to set.
138
VQT2A61
[MULTI]
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 139 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.¢
¢The menu screen is automatically restored when [MULTI] is
selected.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Note
• You can set up to 50 pictures at one time in [MULTI].
• The picture quality of the resized picture will deteriorate.
• It may not be possible to resize pictures recorded with other equipment.
• Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken
with [
], [
] or [
] cannot be resized.
[TRIMMING]
You can enlarge and then clip the important part of the recorded picture.
Select [TRIMMING] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 2/1 to select the picture, and then press
[MENU/SET].
Reduction
Use the front dial and press
3/4/2/1 to select the parts
to be trimmed.
Front dial (clockwise):
Enlargement
Front dial (counter-clockwise):
Reduction
3/4/2/1: Move
Enlargement
()
Move the position
()
Press [MENU/SET].
VQT2A61
139
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 140 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Note
• Depending on the cut size, the picture size of the trimmed picture may become smaller than
that of the original picture.
• The picture quality of the trimmed picture will deteriorate.
• It may not be possible to trim pictures recorded with other equipment.
• Motion pictures, pictures with audio, pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken
with [
], [
] or [
] cannot be trimmed.
• Information regarding the face recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [TRIMMING].
? [ASPECT CONV.]
You can convert pictures taken with a [W] aspect ratio to a [Y], a [X] or a [
ratio.
] aspect
Select [ASPECT CONV.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [Y], [X] or [
press [MENU/SET].
] and then
Press 2/1 to select a picture taken with [W]
aspect ratio, and then press [MENU/SET].
Press 2/1 to determine the horizontal position,
and press [MENU/SET] to set.
• Use 3/4 to set the frame position for pictures rotated vertically.
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
140
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 141 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Note
• After converting the aspect ratio, the picture size may become larger than that of the original
picture.
• You may not be able to convert pictures taken on other equipment.
• The [ASPECT CONV.] cannot be performed on the motion pictures, pictures with audio,
pictures stamped with [TEXT STAMP] and pictures taken with [
], [
] or [
].
• Information regarding the face recognition in the original picture will not be copied to images
having undergone [ASPECT CONV.].
N [ROTATE]/M [ROTATE DISP.]
This mode allows you to automatically display pictures vertically if they were recorded
holding the camera vertically or rotate pictures manually in 90o steps.
Rotate (The picture is rotated manually)
Select [ROTATE] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
• The [ROTATE] function is disabled when [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [OFF].
Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
• Motion pictures and protected pictures cannot be rotated.
Press 3/4 to select the direction to rotate the
picture and then press [MENU/SET].
:
The picture rotates clockwise in steps of 90o.
:
The picture rotates counter-clockwise in steps of 90o.
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Rotate display (The picture is automatically rotated and displayed)
Select [ROTATE DISP.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 4 to select [ON] and then press
[MENU/SET].
• The pictures are displayed without being rotated when you
select [OFF].
• Refer to P56 for information about how to play back pictures.
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
VQT2A61
141
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 142 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
Note
• [ROTATE DISP.] can only be used with the lens compatible (P15) with the direction detection
function (P40).
• When you play back pictures on a PC, they cannot be displayed in the rotated direction unless
the OS or software is compatible with Exif. Exif is a file format for still pictures which allows
recording information etc. to be added. It was established by “JEITA (Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries Association)”.
• It may not be possible to rotate pictures that have been recorded with other equipment.
• The picture will not rotate display when multi playback (P57) or calendar playback (P58) is
selected.
• Pictures recorded with the camera upside down will not be displayed rotated.
[PRINT SET]
DPOF “Digital Print Order Format” is a system that allows the user to select which pictures
to print, how many copies of each picture to print and whether or not to print the recording
date on the pictures when using a DPOF compatible photo printer or photo printing store.
For details, ask at your photo printing store.
For more information visit:
http://panasonic.jp/dc/dpof_110/white_e.htm
Select [PRINT SET] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then
press [MENU/SET].
[SINGLE]
[MULTI]
Select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET].
Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to
the picture.
select the pictures.
Press 3/4 to set the number of prints, and then press [MENU/SET]
to set.
• When [MULTI] has been selected, repeat steps 3 and 4 for each picture. (It is not
possible to use the same setting for a multiple number of pictures.)
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
142
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 143 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
∫ Canceling all the [PRINT SET] settings
1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You cannot select [CANCEL] if not even one picture has been set for printing.
∫ To print the date
After setting the number of prints, set/cancel printing with the recording date by pressing [DISPLAY].
• When you go to a photo printing store for digital printing, be sure to order the printing of the
date additionally if required.
• Depending on the photo printing store or the printer, the date may not be printed even if you set
to print the date. For further information, ask at your photo printing store or refer to the
operating instructions for the printer.
• The date cannot be printed on pictures stamped with text.
Note
• The number of prints can be set from 0 to 999.
• With a printer supporting PictBridge, the date print settings of the printer may take precedence
so check if this is the case.
• It may not be possible to use the print settings with other equipment. In this case, cancel all the
settings, and reset the settings.
• If the file is not based on the DCF standard, the print setting cannot be set.
• [PRINT SET] cannot be set for motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] and pictures that were
taken with the [QUALITY] set to [
].
P [PROTECT]
You can set protection for pictures you do not want to be deleted by mistake.
Select [PROTECT] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select [SINGLE] or [MULTI] and then
press [MENU/SET].
[SINGLE]
[MULTI]
Select the picture, and then
press [MENU/SET].
When [MULTI] has been selected
• Repeat these steps for each picture.
• The settings are canceled when
[MENU/SET] is pressed again.
Press 2/1 to select Press 3/4/2/1 to
the picture.
select the pictures.
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
VQT2A61
143
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 144 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
∫ Canceling all the [PROTECT] settings
1 Select [CANCEL] on the screen shown in step 2 and then press [MENU/SET].
2 Press 3 to select [YES] and then press [MENU/SET].
3 Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• If you press [MENU/SET] while canceling protection, the canceling will stop halfway.
Note
• The protect setting may not be effective on other equipment.
• Even if you protect pictures on a card, they will be deleted if the card is formatted.
• Even if you do not protect pictures on an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card, they
cannot be deleted when the card’s Write-Protect switch is set to [LOCK].
B [AUDIO DUB.]
You can add the audio after taking a picture.
Select [AUDIO DUB.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET] to start audio recording.
• The message [OVERWRITE AUDIO DATA?] screen appears
when audio has already been recorded. Press 3 to select [YES]
and then press [MENU/SET] to start audio recording. (The
original audio is overwritten.)
• Audio is recorded from the built-in microphone on the camera.
• If you press [‚], the audio dubbing is canceled.
Press [MENU/SET] to stop recording.
• It will automatically stop after recording about 10 seconds
without pressing [MENU/SET].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Note
• Audio dubbing may not work properly on pictures recorded by other equipment.
• Audio dubbing does not work on motion pictures, protected pictures and pictures taken with
[
], [
] or [
].
• The sound recording specifications on this model have been changed to improve audio
quality. For this reason, some motion pictures recorded in [MOTION JPEG] and pictures
with audio may not be played back with Panasonic digital cameras (LUMIX)¢.
¢ Models launched before December 2008, and some models launched in 2009 (FS, LS
series).
144
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 145 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Advanced (Playback)
[FACE RECOG.]
All the information regarding the [FACE RECOG.] of the selected image will be cleared.
Select [FACE RECOG.] on the [PLAYBACK] mode menu. (P30)
Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press 3 to select [YES] and then press
[MENU/SET].
Press [‚] to return to the menu screen.
• Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
Note
• Cleared information regarding the [FACE RECOG.] cannot be restored.
• Images cleared of [FACE RECOG.] will not be categorized for face recognition for
[SLIDE SHOW] and [PLAYBACK MODE].
• Clearing of [FACE RECOG.] cannot be done with a protected image.
VQT2A61
145
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 146 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Connecting to other equipment
Playing Back Pictures on a TV Screen
Playing back pictures using the AV cable (supplied)
Preparations: Set the [TV ASPECT]. (P36)
Turn this unit and the TV off.
1 Yellow: to the video input socket
2 White: to the audio input socket
3 Red: to the audio input socket
A Align the marks, and insert.
B AV cable (supplied)
• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.
(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which will cause trouble.)
Connect the AV cable B (supplied) to the video input and the audio
input sockets on the TV.
Connect the AV cable to the [AV OUT] socket on the camera.
Turn the TV on and select external input.
Turn the camera on and then press [(].
Note
• Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], black bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or
the left and right of the pictures.
• Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
• When you play back a picture vertically, it may be blurry.
• Audio will be played back as stereo (2ch).
• The viewfinder cannot be displayed when connected with a AV cable.
146
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 147 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Playing back pictures on a TV with an SD Memory Card slot
Still pictures recorded on an SD Memory Card can be played back on a TV with an SD
Memory Card slot.
Note
• Depending on the TV model, pictures may not be displayed on the full screen.
• Motion pictures recorded with [AVCHD] can be played back on Panasonic TVs (VIERA) with
the AVCHD logo mark. In all other cases, connect the camera to the TV using the AV cable
(supplied) and play back the motion picture.
• You cannot play back pictures on SDHC cards if the TV does not support these cards.
Playing back on the TV with HDMI socket
You can enjoy high quality pictures and motion pictures on the TV by connecting the
camera with the HDMI compatible high definition TV using HDMI mini cable (optional).
What is HDMI?
HDMI is the interface for digital devices. When this unit is connected to a HDMI
compatible device, the image and audio can be output with a digital signal. If you
connect this unit to a HDMI compatible high definition TV and then play back the
recorded high definition images, you can enjoy them in high resolution with high quality
sound.
If you connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link, linked
operations (VIERA Link) are possible. (P148)
Preparations: Check the [HDMI MODE]. (P37)
Turn this unit and the TV off.
HDMI IN
1
2
3
A
B
HDMI socket
TV with HDMI socket
HDMI mini (C type)
Align the marks, and insert.
HDMI mini cable (optional)
• Check the direction of the terminals and plug in/out straight holding onto the plug. (It may result
in malfunction if it is plugged in obliquely or in the wrong direction.)
Connect the HDMI mini cable B (optional) to the HDMI input socket
on the TV.
VQT2A61
147
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 148 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Connect the HDMI mini cable to the [HDMI] socket on the camera.
Turn the TV on and switch to HDMI input.
Turn the camera on and then press [(].
• When [VIERA Link] (P37) is set to [ON] and the camera is connected to a TV supporting
VIERA Link, input of the TV will be switched automatically and playback screen will be
displayed (P148).
Note
• Depending on the [ASPECT RATIO], bands may be displayed on the top and bottom or the left
and right of the pictures.
• Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15,
RP-CDHM30; optional).
Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m) (5 feet), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) (10 feet)
• Output from the HDMI mini cable has priority when both AV cable and HDMI mini cable are
connected.
• HDMI output is not possible even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is
connected to the PC or the printer.
• HDMI connection is disabled and connection with the USB connection cable will take priority
when you connect the USB connection cable while the HDMI mini cable is connected (P147).
• Image is not displayed on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder when the HDMI mini cable is connected.
• [AUDIO DUB.] does not work when connected with a HDMI mini cable.
• When pictures are displayed, they may not be displayed properly depending on the type of TV.
• Read the operating instructions for the TV.
• Audio will be played back as stereo (2ch).
Playback using VIERA Link (HDMI) (HDAVI Control™)
What is the VIERA Link?
• VIERA Link™ is a new name for EZ Sync™.
• This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy
operations when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using a
HDMI mini cable (optional) for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.)
• VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on a HDMI control function using the
standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with
HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed. When using
devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link, refer to the
operating instructions for the respective devices.
• This unit is compatible with VIERA Link Ver.4. VIERA Link Ver.4 is the newest Panasonic
version and is also compatible with existing Panasonic VIERA Link devices. (As of
December 2008)
Preparations: Set the [VIERA Link] to [ON]. (P37)
Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with
a HDMI mini cable (optional) (P147).
Turn the camera on and then press [(].
Operate with the remote control for the TV.
148
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 149 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
1 Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link
2 [SUB MENU] button
3 [RETURN] button
4 [OK] button
¢ The shape of the remote control varies depending on the region. Operate following the TV
guide displayed on screen.
∫ Usable functions
Operate with the remote control for the TV.
1) Multi playback
Press [Red] on the TV remote control to switch the type
of data for playback.
• The type of data for playback changes in the order of [ALL] >
[
]>[
] > [ ] > [ALL].
Select the picture with 3/4/2/1 and press [OK] for one
screen display.
• You can set the slide show etc. when you press [SUB MENU].
2) One screen display
Select the image with 2/1.
Recording information is displayed with 3.
You can return to multi playback (1) with 4.
• Slideshow (3) will start if [OK] is pressed when using one screen display from [ALL] or [
].
• Playback of the motion picture will start when you press [OK] when one screen display
is performed from [
] or [ ]. Use 2/1 for forward/back and 4 to stop playback.
5 Operation icons
3) Slide show
Press [OK] to start/pause the slide show.
Select the image with 2/1 in the Pause Mode.
The screen will be returned to one screen display (2) by pressing 4 to finish
the slide show.
• Playing audio in the slideshow
If [ALL] is selected when playing motion picture audio in the slideshow, press [SUBMENU], set
[EFFECT] to Off and [AUDIO] to On in the slideshow to play audio in the slideshow.
• Turning control icon display on and off
Operation icons can be hidden when you press [RETURN]. Also, operation icons will be
displayed when you press [SUB MENU] while the operation icons are hidden.
Note
• It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2
or more HDMI input terminals on the TV.
• When the [VIERA Link] (P37) of this unit is set to [ON], operation using the button on this unit
will be limited.
• VIERA Link must be activated on the connected TV. (Read the operating instructions of the TV
for how to set etc.)
• If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] (P37) to [OFF].
VQT2A61
149
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 150 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
∫ Other linked operations
Turning the power off:
If you use the remote control for the TV to turn off the power, the power on this unit also
turns off. (When connecting the unit to a PC with a USB cable, the power will not turn off.)
Automatic input switching:
• If you connect with a HDMI mini cable and then turn on the power on this unit, and then press
[(], the input channel on the TV automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power
is in standby status, it will turn on automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power
on link] setting).
• Depending on the HDMI terminal on the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In
this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel. (For details on how to
switch input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
• If VIERA Link does not work properly, refer to page 179.
Note
• If you are unsure whether or not the TV you are using are compatible with VIERA Link, read the
operating instructions for the devices.
• Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV is different depending on the
types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating
instructions of the TV for the operations that support on the TV.
• Operation is not possible with a cable that is not based on the HDMI standard.
Do not use any other cables except a genuine Panasonic HDMI mini cable (RP-CDHM15,
RP-CDHM30; optional).
Part numbers: RP-CDHM15 (1.5 m) (5 feet), RP-CDHM30 (3.0 m) (10 feet)
• VIERA Link will not work even if you connect the HDMI mini cable while the unit is connected to
the PC or the printer.
• [HDMI MODE] (P37) [1080i] is valid only for the following conditions:
Outputting to HDMI:
– During playback of motion pictures recorded with [
]
– When [PICTURE PLAY] is selected in the [PLAYBACK MODE]
– When [PICTURE ONLY] is selected in the [SLIDE SHOW]
When the [VIERA Link] is set to [ON]:
– During playback of still pictures on one screen after selecting [
] displayed on the TV
screen
– During playback of motion pictures recorded with [
] after selecting [
] displayed on the
TV screen
– When [PICTURE ONLY] is selected for the [SLIDE SHOW]
It will be output as [720p] except for the above conditions.
• The screen will be blacked out for a while when displaying in 1 screen, the [HDMI MODE] (P37)
of the camera is set to [AUTO] or [1080i], and [
] displayed on the TV screen is selected, but
this is not a malfunction.
• If the picture is disrupted when [HDMI MODE] (P37) is set to [AUTO] or [1080i], change the
setting to [720p].
150
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 151 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Saving the recorded still pictures and motion
pictures
Methods to export still pictures and motion pictures to other devices will vary depending on
the file format. (JPEG, RAW, AVCHD, or Motion JPEG). Here are a few suggestions.
Copy the playback image using an AV cable
File formats that can be used: [AVCHD], [Motion JPEG]
Copy images played back with this unit to DVD disc, hard disk, or video using a DVD
recorder, or video.
This can be played back with equipment that is not compatible with high definition
(AVCHD), so it is convenient for distributing copies. Image will be standard quality instead
of high definition at this time.
1
2
3
A
1
2
3
Yellow: to the video input socket
White: to the audio input socket
Red: to the audio input socket
AV cable (supplied)
Connect this unit with the recording equipment with an AV cable (supplied)
Start the playback of this unit
Start the recording on the recording equipment
• When ending the recording (copying), stop the playback on this unit after stopping the
recording in recording equipment.
Note
• When you play back motion pictures on 4:3 aspect ratio TV, you must set [TV ASPECT] (P36)
on this unit to [4:3] before starting a copy. The image will be vertically long if you play back
motion pictures copied with [16:9] setting on a [4:3] aspect TV.
• Do not use any other AV cables except the supplied one.
• It is recommended to turn off the display of the screen by pressing the [DISPLAY] on the
camera while copying. (P57)
• See the instruction manual for the recording equipment about the details of copying and playing
back.
VQT2A61
151
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 152 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Copying to a PC
File formats that can be used: [JPEG], [RAW]/[AVCHD], [Motion JPEG]
It is possible to acquire still pictures and motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] or [MOTION
JPEG] formats, or create standard quality DVD video which is not high definition from the
motion picture that was recorded as [AVCHD], using the software “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1
HD Edition” in the CD-ROM (supplied). (P152)
• If the files and folders related to [AVCHD] motion pictures are
deleted, modified, or moved by the Windows Explorer or
similar, it becomes unable to perform playback, edit, etc., so
always use “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” to acquire
the [AVCHD] motion pictures.
Connecting to a PC
You can acquire recorded pictures to a PC by connecting the camera and the PC.
• You can easily print out or mail the pictures you have imported. Use of the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO
3.1 HD Edition” bundled software on the CD-ROM (supplied) is a convenient way of doing this.
• Read the separate operating instructions for the supplied software for more information about
the software in the CD-ROM (supplied) and how to install it.
∫ PC that can be used
2000/XP/Vista
Macintosh
OS 9/OS X
—
≤¢1
—
—
≤¢2
—
98/98SE
Can the
PHOTOfunSTUDIO be
used?
Can the [AVCHD] motion
picture be acquired to the
PC?
Can the still pictures and
[MOTION JPEG] motion
pictures in the digital
camera be acquired to
the PC using a USB
connection cable?
Is the installation of a
USB driver required?
Windows
Me
≤
(OS 9.2.2/OS X
[10.1~10.5])
≤
≤
—
—
• PC with Windows 95 or older, or Mac OS 8.x or older cannot be connected via USB, but it can
acquire the pictures if an SD memory card reader/writer can be used.
¢1 It is necessary for Internet Explorer 6.0 or newer to be installed. PC with higher processing
performance is required depending on the function to be used. It may not play back correctly
or operate correctly depending on the environment of the PC used.
¢2 Always acquire the [AVCHD] motion pictures using the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD
Edition”.
152
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 153 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Acquiring of still pictures and [MOTION JPEG] motion pictures
(other than [AVCHD] motion pictures)
Preparations: Turn the LCD monitor so the LCD will show out.
Turn on the camera and the PC.
A USB connection cable (supplied)
• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.
(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which will cause trouble.)
B Align the marks, and insert.
C AC adaptor (supplied)
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P25). If the remaining battery
power becomes low while the camera and the PC are communicating, the status indicator
blinks and the alarm beeps.
Refer to “Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely” (P154) before disconnecting the
USB connection cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
Connect the camera to a PC via the USB connection cable A
(supplied).
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of
cables other than the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction.
Press 3/4 to select [PC], and then press [MENU/SET].
USB MODE
PLEASE SELECT
THE USB MODE
• If [USB MODE] (P36) is set to [PC] in the [SETUP] menu in
PC
advance, the camera will be automatically connected to the PC
PictBridge(PTP)
without displaying the [USB MODE] selection screen. Since
SELECT
SET
there is no need to set this each time you connect to the PC, it
is convenient.
• When the camera has been connected to the PC with [USB MODE] set to
[PictBridge(PTP)], a message may appear on the PC’s screen. Select [Cancel] to close
the screen, and disconnect the camera from the PC. Then set [USB MODE] to [PC]
again.
MENU
Double-click on [Removable Disk] in [My Computer].
• When using a Macintosh, the drive is displayed on the desktop. (“LUMIX”, “NO_NAME”
or “Untitled” is displayed.)
Double-click [DCIM] folder.
VQT2A61
153
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 154 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Using a drag-and-drop operation, move the pictures you want to
acquire or the folder storing those pictures to any different folder on
the PC.
∫ Disconnecting the USB connection cable safely
• Proceed with the hardware removal using “Safely Remove Hardware” on the task tray of the
PC. If the icon is not displayed, check that [ACCESS] is not displayed on the LCD monitor of
the digital camera before removing the hardware.
Note
• Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P25).
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off and disconnect the USB connection
cable. Otherwise, data may be destroyed.
• HDMI connection is disabled and connection with the USB connection cable will take priority
when you connect the USB connection cable while the HDMI mini cable is connected (P147).
∫ Viewing the contents of the card using the PC (folder composition)
• Folders and images processed in the PC cannot be played back on the camera. It is
recommended to use the “PHOTOfunSTUDIO 3.1 HD Edition” bundled software on the
CD-ROM (supplied) when you write the image from PC to a card.
1
2
Folder number
Color space P: sRGB
_: AdobeRGB
3
File number
4
JPG:
Pictures
MOV:
Motion pictures
RW2:
Pictures in RAW files
MISC:
DPOF print
Favorite
AVCHD:
[AVCHD] Motion pictures
A new folder is created when pictures are taken in the following situations.
• After [NO.RESET] (P36) in the [SETUP] menu has been executed
• When a card containing a folder with the same folder number has been inserted (Such as when
pictures were taken using another make of camera)
• When there is a picture with file number 999 inside the folder
∫ Connection in the PTP mode (WindowsR XP, Windows VistaR and Mac OS X only)
Set [USB MODE] to [PictBridge(PTP)].
Data can now be read only from the card into the PC.
• When there are 1000 or more pictures on a card, the pictures may not be imported in the PTP
mode.
• [AVCHD] motion picture cannot be played back in PTP mode.
154
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 155 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Printing the Pictures
If you connect the camera to a printer supporting PictBridge, you can select the pictures to
be printed out and instruct that printing be started on the camera’s LCD monitor.
Preparations: Turn on the camera and the printer.
Perform the print quality and other settings at the printer before printing the
pictures.
A USB connection cable (supplied)
• Check the directions of the connectors, and plug them straight in or unplug them straight out.
(Otherwise the connectors may be bent out of shape which will cause trouble.)
B Align the marks, and insert.
C AC adaptor (supplied)
• Use a battery with sufficient battery power or the AC adaptor (P25). If the remaining battery
power becomes low while the camera and the printer are connected, the status indicator blinks
and the alarm beeps. If this happens during printing, stop printing at once. If not printing,
disconnect the USB connection cable.
Connect the camera to a printer via the USB connection cable A
(supplied).
• When the camera is connected to the printer, the cable disconnect prohibit icon [å]
appears. Do not disconnect the USB cable while [å] is displayed.
Press 3/4 to select [PictBridge(PTP)], and then
press [MENU/SET].
USB MODE
PLEASE SELECT
THE USB MODE
PC
PictBridge(PTP)
SELECT
SET
MENU
Note
• Do not use any other USB connection cables except the supplied one. Use of cables other than
the supplied USB connection cable may cause malfunction.
• Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the AC adaptor (P25).
• Before inserting or removing a card, turn the camera off, and disconnect the USB connection
cable.
• HDMI connection is disabled and connection with the USB connection cable will take priority
when you connect the USB connection cable while the HDMI mini cable is connected (P147).
• Motion pictures recorded with [AVCHD] cannot be printed.
VQT2A61
155
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 156 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
Single picture
Press 3 to select [SINGLE PICTURE] and then
press [MENU/SET].
PictBridge
SINGLE PICTURE
PRINT SET (DPOF)
SELECT
Press 2/1 to select the picture and then press 4.
• The message disappears in about 2 seconds.
PictBridge
SET
100_0001
PLEASE SELECT
THE PICTURE TO PRINT
SELECT
PRINT
Press 3/4 to select [PRINT START] and then
press [MENU/SET].
• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing halfway.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
MENU
EXIT
SINGLE PICTURE
PRINT START
PRINT WITH DATE
NUM. OF PRINTS
PAPER SIZE
PAGE LAYOUT
CANCEL
SELECT
MENU
OFF
1
SET
MENU
Print Settings
Select and set the items both on the screen in step 3 of the
“Single picture” procedures.
• When you want to print pictures in a paper size or a layout which is not
supported by the camera, set [PAPER SIZE] or [PAGE LAYOUT] to
[{] and then set the paper size or the layout on the printer. (For
details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.)
SINGLE PICTURE
PRINT START
PRINT WITH DATE
NUM. OF PRINTS
PAPER SIZE
PAGE LAYOUT
CANCEL
OFF
1
SELECT EXIT
MENU
[PRINT WITH DATE]
Item
Description of settings
[OFF]
Date is not printed.
[ON]
Date is printed.
• If the printer does not support date printing, the date cannot be printed on the picture.
• Since the printer’s settings may take precedence over the print with date setting, check the
printer’s print with date setting as well.
• When printing images with a text stamp, please remember to set print with date to [OFF] or the
date will print on top.
Note
When asking the photo shop to print the pictures
• By stamping the date using [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or setting date printing at the time of the
[PRINT SET] (P142) setting before going to a photo shop, the dates can be printed at the photo
shop.
156
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 157 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
[NUM. OF PRINTS]
You can set the number of prints up to 999.
• You can also use the front dial to set.
[PAPER SIZE]
Item
Description of settings
{
Settings on the printer are prioritized.
[L/3.5qk5q]
89 mmk127 mm
[2L/5qk7q]
127 mmk178 mm
[POSTCARD]
100 mmk148 mm
[16:9]
101.6 mmk180.6 mm
[A4]
210 mmk297 mm
[A3]
297 mmk420 mm
[10k15cm]
100 mmk150 mm
[4qk6q]
101.6 mmk152.4 mm
[8qk10q]
203.2 mmk254 mm
[LETTER]
216 mmk279.4 mm
[CARD SIZE]
54 mmk85.6 mm
• Paper sizes not supported by the printer will not be displayed.
[PAGE LAYOUT] (Layouts for printing that can be set with this unit)
Item
{
Description of settings
Settings on the printer are prioritized.
á
1 picture with no frame on 1 page
â
1 picture with a frame on 1 page
ã
2 pictures on 1 page
ä
4 pictures on 1 page
• An item cannot be selected if the printer does not support the page layout.
VQT2A61
157
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 158 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Connecting to other equipment
[PRINT SET (DPOF)]
• Set the print setting on the camera in advance. (P142)
Press 4 to select [PRINT SET (DPOF)] and then
press [MENU/SET].
PictBridge
SINGLE PICTURE
PRINT SET (DPOF)
SELECT
Press 3/4 to select [PRINT START] and then
press [MENU/SET].
• You cannot select [PRINT START] when the print setting is not
set. Select [DPOF SET] and then set the print setting. (P142)
• Press [MENU/SET] to cancel printing halfway.
• Disconnect the USB connection cable after printing.
SET
MENU
PRINT SET (DPOF)
PRINT START
PAPER SIZE
PAGE LAYOUT
DPOF SET
CANCEL
SELECT
SET
MENU
∫ Layout printing
When printing a picture several times on 1 sheet of paper
For example, if you want to print the same picture 4 times on 1 sheet of paper, set
[PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [NUM. OF PRINTS] to 4 for the picture that you
want to print.
When printing different pictures on 1 sheet of paper (only in print setting)
For example, if you want to print 4 different pictures on 1 sheet of paper, set
[PAGE LAYOUT] to [ä] and then set [COUNT] in [PRINT SET] (P142) to 1 for each of the
4 pictures.
Note
• The camera is receiving an error message from the printer when the [¥] indication lights
orange during printing. After finishing printing, make sure there are no problems with the
printer.
• If the total number of prints or the number of pictures printed is high, pictures may be printed
several times in print setting. The remaining number of prints indicated may differ from the
number set. This is not a malfunction.
• When the pictures in RAW files are to be printed, the JPEG pictures recorded simultaneously
by the camera will be printed. If JPEG pictures do not exist, RAW file pictures cannot be
printed.
158
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 159 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Others
Using an external flash (optional)
After attaching the external flash, the effective range will be increased when compared to
the camera’s built in flash.
Preparations: Turn off the camera and close the built-in flash.
∫ Using the dedicated flash (DMW-FL220; optional)
Attach the dedicated flash to the hot shoe A
and then turn on the camera and the dedicated
flash.
• Be sure to firmly secure to the dedicated flash with the lock
ring B.
Select [FLASH] on the [REC] mode menu. (P30)
Press 3/4 to select the mode and then press
[MENU/SET].
• While the external flash is connected, the following icons are
displayed.
:
External flash Forced ON
: External flash Slow sync.
Press [MENU/SET] to close the menu.
• You can also press the shutter button halfway to close the menu.
∫ When using other commercially available external flashes without
communication functions with the camera (DMC-GH1)
• It is necessary to set the exposure on the external flash. If you want to use the external flash in
Auto Mode, use an external flash that allows you to set the aperture value and the ISO
sensitivity to match the settings on the camera.
• Set to Aperture-priority AE Mode or Manual Exposure Mode on the camera and then set the
same aperture value and ISO sensitivity on the external flash. (The exposure cannot be
compensated adequately due to the change on the aperture value in Shutter-priority AE Mode
and the external flash cannot control the light adequately in Program AE Mode because the
aperture value cannot be fixed.)
Note
• You can set the aperture value, the shutter speed and the ISO sensitivity on the camera even
when attaching the external flash.
• Some commercial external flashes have synchro terminals with high-voltage or reversed
polarity. Using such extra flashes may cause a malfunction or the camera may not operate
normally.
• If you use commercially available external flashes with communication functions other than the
dedicated one, they may not operate normally or they may be damaged. Do not use them.
VQT2A61
159
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 160 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
• Even if the external flash is turned off, the camera may enter the external flash mode when the
external flash is attached. When you are not using the external flash, detach it.
• When attaching the external flash, the built-in flash cannot be activated.
• Do not open the built-in flash when an external flash is attached.
• The camera will become unstable when attaching the external flash, it is recommended to use
a tripod when taking picture.
• Turn off the camera when removing the external flash.
• Detach the external flash when carrying the camera.
• When attaching the external flash, do not hold only the external flash because it may detach
from the camera.
• If you use the external flash when the white balance is set to [
] finely adjust the white
balance depending on the picture quality. (P85)
• If you take pictures close to the subject in Wide, the vignetting effect may appear on the bottom
of the recorded picture.
• The external flash cannot be used while the stereo microphone (DMW-MS1; optional) is in use.
• Read the operating instructions of the external flash for details.
Using the Protector/Filter (optional)
The MC protector (DMW-LMCH62; optional) is a transparent filter which affects neither the
colors nor the amount of light, so it can always be used to protect the camera’s lens.
The ND filter (DMW-LND62; optional) reduces the amount of light to approximately 1/8th
(equal to adjusting the aperture value 3 increments) without affecting the color balance.
PL filter (DMW-LPL62; optional) will suppress the reflected light from a metal or non
spherical surfaces (flat non-metallic surfaces, water vapour or invisible particles in the air),
making it possible to take a picture with enhanced contrast.
Attach the filter.
A MC protector
B ND filter
C PL filter
Note
• Do not attach multiple filters at the same time.
• If the filter is tightened too much, you may not be able to remove it. Do not tighten it too much.
• If the filter is dropped, it may be destroyed. Be careful not to drop it when attaching it to the
camera.
• Be careful not to get a fingerprint, dirt, etc., on the filter when it is attached, otherwise the focus
may be adjusted to the lens, resulting in the subject being out of focus.
• You can attach the lens cap or the lens hood when the filter is attached.
• Refer to the instructions for each filter for details.
160
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 161 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
• MCu“Multi-coated”
NDu“Neutral Density”
• It is recommended to use the MC protector (DMW-LMCH62; optional), the ND filter
(DMW-LND62; optional), or the PL filter (DMW-LPL62; optional) with the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8
lens included in DMC-GH1K.
Using the Remote Shutter (optional)
If you use the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional), you can avoid jitter (camera shake)
when using a tripod and you can keep the shutter pressed fully when taking pictures with
[B] (Bulb) or Burst Mode. The remote shutter works similar to the shutter button on the
camera.
Firmly connect the remote shutter to
the [REMOTE] socket on the camera as
far as it will go.
MIC
REMOTE
Take a picture.
1 Press the button lightly to press halfway.
2 Press the button fully to take the picture.
(Press it as far as it will go.)
∫ About [LOCK] on the remote shutter
• You can keep the shutter button pressed fully. This is
effective when taking pictures with [B] (Bulb) (P92) or in
Burst Mode (P72).
• While pressing the shutter button fully, slide it to the
[LOCK] side.
• Slide it to the other side to cancel [LOCK].
VQT2A61
161
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 162 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Note
• Do not use any other remote shutters except DMW-RSL1 (optional).
• You cannot operate the camera with the remote shutter in the following cases.
– When the power save mode is canceled
• Record with Creative Motion Picture Mode when using for motion picture recording.
• The remote shutter cannot be used while the stereo microphone (DMW-MS1; optional) is in
use.
Using an external microphone (optional)
If you use the stereo microphone (DMW-MS1; optional), you can switch to either stereo or
monaural sound recording.
It is also possible to reduce the wind noise efficiently by switching the [WIND CUT OFF/
ON] switch to [ON].
Preparations: Turn off the camera and close the built-in flash.
Attach the stereo microphone to the hot
shoe A.
• Be sure to firmly secure to the stereo microphone with
the lock ring B.
Firmly connect the stereo mini-plug cord to
the [MIC] socket on the camera as far as it
will go.
Turn on the camera and the stereo
microphone.
• While the external microphone is connected, [
displayed on the screen.
∫ About the Off/On Mode Selector Switch
] is
MIC
REMOTE
[OFF]:
Turn off the stereo microphone power.
[MONO]:
Records sound in front of the digital
camera in monaural.
[STEREO]: Records sound in a wide area in stereo.
Battery Check Lamp [BATTERY]
• When the Off/On Mode Selector Switch is changed from [OFF] to [MONO] or [STEREO], the
Battery Check Lamp [BATTERY] will light temporarily if there is still plenty of power in the
battery. If the Battery Check Lamp [BATTERY] does not light temporarily, replace the battery
with a new one.
162
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 163 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Note
• When attaching the stereo microphone, do not hold only the stereo microphone because it may
detach from the camera.
• Set the wind noise reduction only on the stereo microphone side.
• The stereo microphone cannot be used while the external flash (optional) is in use.
• The stereo microphone cannot be used while the remote shutter (DMW-RSL1; optional) is in
use.
• Read the operating instructions of the stereo microphone for details.
Screen Display
• The following images are examples of when the display screen is set to [
monitor style) in the LCD monitor.
∫ In recording
Recording in Program AE Mode [
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
] (LCD
] (Initial setting)
Flash mode (P65)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Film mode (P87)
Optical Image Stabilizer (P119)/
: Jitter
STD
alert (P53)
¢1
: Single (P51)
: Burst (P72)
: Auto Bracket (P74)
: Self-timer (P76)
REC MODE (P105)/Recording quality
P 4.0 30 −3 0 3 AUTO AWB 9
23
(P105)
22
Picture size (P117)
21 20 19 18 17 16 15
Quality (P118)
LCD mode¢2 (P35)
Intelligent Exposure (P121)
Battery indication (P22)
Card (P27) (displayed only during recording)
Recording state (Flashes red.)/
Focus (P53) (Lights green.)
AF area (P53, 77)
Dial operation guide (P130)/
Elapsed recording time (P104)
Number of recordable pictures¢3 (P181)
White balance (P83)
ISO sensitivity (P86)
Exposure Compensation value (P71)/Manual exposure assistance (P91)
Shutter speed (P53)
Aperture value (P53)
Recording mode
Metering mode (P119)
AF mode (P77)
11
12
13
14
+
VQT2A61
163
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 164 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
∫ In recording (after settings)
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
Flash output adjustment (P69)
2nd curtain synchro (P70)
24 25
26 27
Extended Optical Zoom (P55, 121)
Histogram (P64)
A
Travel date (P113)
2nd
nd
45
AF tracking operation (P47, 78)
44
¢
3
Available recording time (P104): R8m30s 43
42
White balance fine adjustment (P85)
41
White Balance Bracket (P85)
40
My Color Mode adjustment (P100)
39
28
C1
AFL AEL
BKT
38
Current date and time/“: Travel
AWB R12s
P
29
¢2,
4
destination setting
(P115)
Custom settings (P101)
37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30
Program Shift (P54)
AE lock (P81)
Face recognition (P110)
AF lock (P81)
LCD recording information
Age¢2, 5 (P99)
¢
2, 4
21 20 23,37 19 1,24,25 10 15,29
Location
(P113)
Name¢2, 5 (P99)
Number of days that have passed since the
9
P F4.0 1/30
17
departure date¢2, 4 (P113)
WB
ISO
AF
¢6
0
16,30,31
AWB AUTO
Self-timer (P76)
−1
1
Spot metering target (P119)
22
−2
2
Audio recording (P124)
0 3
5,6,26
−3
WIND CUT (P107)
STANDARD
Digital zoom (P55, 121)
3
¢1 Only displayed in the LCD recording
information window.
¢2 Only displayed in the LCD monitor.
¢3 It is possible to switch the display between the
number of recordable pictures and available
recording time with the [REMAINING DISP.]
setting in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
In displays other than the LCD recording
information display, it will display [9999i] when
the number of recordable pictures exceeds
10000.
¢4 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when the
camera is turned on, after setting the clock and
after switching from playback mode to
recording mode.
¢5 This is displayed for about 5 seconds when this
unit is turned on in [BABY1]/[BABY2] or [PET]
in Scene Mode.
¢6 This is displayed during countdown.
164
VQT2A61
5,7 9
2 4
18,32
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 165 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
∫ In playback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Playback mode (P56)
Film Mode (P87)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Protected picture (P143)
Number of prints (P142)
1
STD
REC MODE (P105)/Recording quality
20
1/9
(P105)
19
3s
18
Picture size (P117)
12s
17
Quality (P118)
LCD mode (P35)
16
Battery indication (P22)
15
Picture number/Total pictures
0 100
P F4.0 30
Elapsed playback time (P131): 8m30s
Motion picture recording time
14
13
(P131): 8m30s
Detailed
information
display
Favorites settings (P134)
Recording information¢7
14
Age (P99)
Name (P99)/Location (P113)/Title (P135)
30
F4.0
Number of days that have passed since the
0
departure date (P113)
WB
Audio playback (P132)
ISO 100 AFS
: Motion picture playback (P131)
Stamped with text indication (P136)
P STANDARD
Favorites (P134)
10:00
DEC. 1.2009
s
Cable disconnection warning icon (P155)
RGB
100-0001
Recorded date and time/Travel destination
setting (P115)
5,6 7
23
Folder/File number¢7 (P154)
¢7
Histogram
display
Color space (P122)
Histogram (P64)
10
11
12
21
22
24
¢7 This is not displayed for motion pictures
recorded in [AVCHD].
14
F4.0
0
1/9
30
ISO100
100-0001
22
10
VQT2A61
165
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 166 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Cautions for Use
Optimal use of the camera
Take care not to drop or knock the unit or put a lot of pressure on it.
• Take care not to knock or drop the bag/case that you inserted the camera in as the shock may
cause damage to the camera, lens or LCD monitor.
• Do not use a paper bag as it can easily rip causing the camera to fall and be damaged.
• We strongly recommend you purchase a good camera bag/case from your local dealer to
protect your camera.
Keep the camera as far away as possible from electromagnetic equipment (such as
microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).
• If you use the camera on top of or near a TV, the pictures and sound on the camera may be
disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.
• Do not use the camera near cell phones because doing so may result in noise adversely
affecting the pictures and sound.
• Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields
created by speakers or large motors.
• Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by microprocessors may adversely affect the
camera, disturbing the pictures and sound.
• If the camera is adversely affected by electromagnetic equipment and stops functioning
properly, turn the camera off and remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor. Then reinsert
the battery or reconnect AC adaptor and turn the camera on.
Do not use the camera near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines.
• If you record near radio transmitters or high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and sound may
be adversely affected.
Always use the supplied cords and cables. If you use optional accessories, use the
cords and the cables supplied with them.
Do not extend the cords or the cables.
Do not spray the camera with insecticides or volatile chemicals.
• If the camera is sprayed with such chemicals, the body of the camera may be damaged and the
surface finish may peel off.
• Do not keep rubber or plastic products in contact with the camera for a long period of time.
Cleaning
Before cleaning the camera, remove the battery or disconnect the power plug from
the outlet. Then wipe the camera with a dry soft cloth.
• When the camera is soiled badly, it can be cleaned by wiping the dirt off with a wrung wet cloth,
and then with a dry cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt or dust on the zoom ring and the focus ring with a dry, dustless cloth.
• Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, alcohol, kitchen detergents, etc., to clean the
camera, since it may deteriorate the external case or the coating may peel off.
• When using a chemical cloth, be sure to follow the accompanying instructions.
166
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 167 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
∫ About dirt on the image sensor
This camera features an interchangeable lens system so dirt may get inside the camera
body when changing lenses. Depending on the recording conditions, dirt on the image
sensor may appear on the recorded picture.
Do not change lenses where there is a lot of dust, and always attach the body cap when a
lens is not attached to the camera, so that dirt or dust does not get inside the camera body.
Remove any dirt on the body cap before attaching it.
Dust reduction function
This unit has a dust reduction function that will blow off the debris and dust that have
affixed to the front of the imaging device. This function will function automatically when
the camera is turned on, but if you see dust, perform the [SENSOR CLEANING]
(P130) in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu.
Removing dirt on the image sensor
The image sensor is very precise and delicate, so be sure to observe the following when
you do have to clean it yourself.
• Blow off the dust on the surface of the image sensor with a commercially available blower
brush. Be careful not to blow too strongly.
• Do not put the blower brush further inside than the lens mount.
• Do not let the blower brush touch the image sensor as the image sensor may get scratched.
• Do not use any objects except a blower brush to clean the image sensor.
• If you cannot remove the dirt or dust with the blower, consult the dealer or your nearest Service
Center.
For care of the eye cup on the viewfinder
• As the eye cup cannot be removed, gently wipe it with a dry and soft cloth, and be careful not to
remove it.
• If you wipe the eye cup too hard and it is removed, consult the dealer or your nearest Service
Center.
About the LCD monitor/Viewfinder
• Do not press the LCD monitor with excessive force. Uneven colors may appear on the LCD
monitor and it may malfunction.
• If the camera is cold when you turn it on, the picture on the LCD monitor/Viewfinder will be
slightly darker than usual at first. However, the picture will return to normal brightness when the
internal temperature of the camera increases.
Extremely high precision technology is employed to produce the LCD monitor/
Viewfinder screen. However there may be some dark or bright spots (red, blue or
green) on the screen. This is not a malfunction. The LCD monitor/Viewfinder screen
has more than 99.99% effective pixels with a mere 0.01% of the pixels inactive or
always lit. The spots will not be recorded on pictures on a card.
VQT2A61
167
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 168 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
About the Lens
• Do not press the lens with excessive force.
• Do not leave the camera with the lens facing the sun as rays of light from the sun may cause it
to malfunction. Also, be careful when placing the camera outside or near a window.
• When there is dirt (water, oil, and fingerprints, etc.) on the surface of the lens, the picture may
be affected. Lightly wipe the surface of the lens with a soft, dry cloth before and after taking
pictures.
• Do not place the lens mount facing downwards. Do not allow the lens mount contacts 1 to
become dirty.
Battery
The battery is a rechargeable lithium ion battery. Its ability to generate power comes
from the chemical reaction that takes place inside it. This reaction is susceptible to
the surrounding temperature and humidity. If the temperature is too high or too low,
the operating time of the battery will become shorter.
Always remove the battery after use.
If you drop the battery accidentally, check to see if the body of the battery and the
terminals are damaged.
• Inserting a damaged battery in the camera will damage the camera.
Bring charged spare batteries when going out.
• Be aware that the operating time of the battery becomes shorter in low temperature conditions
such as at a ski resort.
• When you travel, do not forget to bring the battery charger (supplied) and the AC cable
(supplied) so that you can charge the battery in the country that you are traveling in.
Dispose of unusable battery.
• The battery has a limited life.
• Do not throw the battery into fire because it may cause an explosion.
• The unusable battery should be discarded in accordance with battery recycling laws. Call the
RBRC hotline at 1-800-822-8837 for information.
Do not allow battery terminals to come into contact with metal objects (such as
necklaces, hairpins etc.).
• This can cause short circuiting or heat generation and you may be badly burned if you touch a
battery.
Charger
• If you use the battery charger near a radio, the radio reception may be disturbed.
• Keep the charger 1 m (3.28 feet) or more away from radios.
• The charger may generate whirring sounds when it is being used. This is not a malfunction.
• After use, be sure to disconnect the power supply device from the electrical outlet. (A very
small amount of current is consumed if it is left connected.)
• Keep the terminals of the charger and battery clean.
168
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 169 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Card
Do not leave the card where the temperature is high, where electromagnetic waves
or static electricity are easily generated or exposed to direct sunlight.
Do not bend or drop the card.
• The card may be damaged or the recorded content may be damaged or deleted.
• Put the card in the card case or the storage bag after use and when storing or carrying the
card.
• Do not allow dirt, dust or water to get into the terminals on the back of the card and do not touch
the terminals with your fingers.
Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card
• “Format” or “delete” using the camera or a PC will only modify the file management information,
and it will not erase the data in the memory card completely.
It is recommended to physically destroy the memory card or use the commercially available
computer data deletion software to completely erase the data in the memory card before
transferring to another party or disposing.
Management of data in the memory card is the responsibility of the user.
About the personal information
If a name or birthday is set for [BABY1]/[BABY2]/Face Recognition function, this personal
information is kept in the camera and included in the recorded image.
Disclaimer
• Information including personal information may be altered or vanish due to erroneous
operation, effect of static electricity, accident, malfunction, repair, or other handlings.
Please note in advance that Panasonic is not liable in any way for any direct or indirect damage
from the alteration or vanishing of information or personal information.
When requesting a repair, transferring to another party or disposing
• Reset the settings to protect the personal information. (P36)
• Remove the memory card from the camera when requesting a repair.
• Settings may return to factory default when camera is repaired.
• Please contact the dealer where you purchased the camera or your nearest Service Center if
above operations are not possible due to malfunction.
When transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card, please refer to
“Notice for when transferring to another party, or disposing of the memory card” on
P169.
When not using the camera for a long period of time
• Store the battery in a cool and dry place with a relatively stable temperature: [Recommended
temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF), Recommended humidity: 40% to 60%]
• Always remove the battery and the card from the camera.
• If the battery is left inserted in the camera, it will discharge even if the camera is turned off. If
the battery continues to be left in the camera, it will discharge excessively and may become
unusable even if charged.
• When storing the battery for a long period of time, we recommend charging it once a year.
Remove the battery from the camera and store it again after it has completely discharged.
• We recommend storing the camera with a desiccant (silica gel) when you keep it in a closet or
a cabinet.
• Check all the parts before taking pictures when you have not used the camera for a long
period of time.
VQT2A61
169
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 170 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
About the picture data
• Recorded data may be damaged or lost if the camera breaks down due to inappropriate
handling. Panasonic will not be liable for any damage suffered due to loss of recorded data.
About tripods
• When you use a tripod, make sure the tripod is stable when this unit is attached to it.
• You may not be able to remove the battery when using a tripod.
• Make sure that the screw on the tripod is not at an angle when attaching or detaching the
camera. You may damage the screw on the camera if you use excessive force when turning it.
Also, the camera body and the rating label may be damaged or scratched if the camera is
attached too tightly to the tripod.
• Read the operating instructions for the tripod carefully.
About the shoulder strap
• If you attach a heavy interchangeable lens (more than about 1 kg) to the camera body, do not
carry the camera by the soulder strap. Hold the camera and the lens when carrying them.
Message Display
Confirmation messages or error messages will be displayed on the screen in some cases.
The major messages are described below as examples.
[THIS MEMORY CARD IS LOCKED]
> The Write-Protect switch on the SD Memory Card and the SDHC Memory Card are
moved to [LOCK]. Move the switch back to unlock it. (P27)
[NO VALID PICTURE TO PLAY]
> Record a picture or insert a card with a recorded picture and then play it.
[THIS PICTURE IS PROTECTED]
> Delete the picture after canceling the protect setting. (P143)
[THIS PICTURE CANNOT BE DELETED]/[SOME PICTURES CANNOT BE DELETED]
• Pictures not based on the DCF standard cannot be deleted.
> If you want to delete some pictures, format the card after saving necessary data on a PC
etc. (P38)
[NO ADDITIONAL SELECTIONS CAN BE MADE]
• The number of pictures, which can be set at one time when [MULTI] has been selected for
[DELETE MULTI] (P60), [FAVORITE] (P134), [TITLE EDIT] (P135), [TEXT STAMP] (P136) or
[RESIZE] (P138) has been exceeded.
> Reduce the number of pictures set, and then repeat the operation.
• More than 999 favorites have been set.
170
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 171 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
[CANNOT BE SET ON THIS PICTURE]
• [TITLE EDIT], [TEXT STAMP] or [PRINT SET] cannot be set for pictures not based on the
DCF standard.
[MEMORY CARD ERROR
FORMAT THIS CARD?]
• This card has a format which is not recognized by the camera.
> Format the card again with the camera after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P38)
[PLEASE CHECK THAT THE LENS IS ATTACHED CORRECTLY]
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Check that the lens is attached correctly and then turn the camera off and on.
> If the message persists, contact the dealer or your nearest Service Center.
[THE LENS IS NOT ATTACHED PROPERLY.]
• Detach the lens and then attach it again. (P17)
[MEMORY CARD PARAMETER ERROR]/[THIS MEMORY CARD CANNOT BE USED]
> Use a card compatible with this unit. (P27)
• You can only use an SDHC Memory Card if using cards with 4 GB or more capacity.
[MEMORY CARD ERROR
PLEASE CHECK THE CARD]
• An error has occurred accessing the card.
> Insert the card again.
> Insert a different card.
[READ ERROR/WRITE ERROR
PLEASE CHECK THE CARD]
• It has failed to read or write data.
> Remove the card after turning the power [OFF]. Insert the card again, turn the power on,
and try to read or write the data again.
• The card may be broken.
> Insert a different card.
[CANNOT RECORD DUE TO INCOMPATIBLE FORMAT (NTSC/PAL) DATA ON THIS
CARD.]
> If you want to delete some pictures, format the card after saving necessary data on a PC
etc. (P38)
> Insert a different card.
[MOTION RECORDING WAS CANCELLED DUE TO THE LIMITATION OF THE
WRITING SPEED OF THE CARD]
• It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when
recording motion pictures.
¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.
• When you set the picture quality to [
], [
] or [
], we recommend using a high-speed
card with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package.
• In the event that it stops even after using a “10MB/s” card or higher, the data writing speed has
deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format (P38).
• Depending on the type of SD Memory Card or SDHC Memory Card, motion picture recording
may stop in the middle.
VQT2A61
171
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 172 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
[A FOLDER CANNOT BE CREATED]
• A folder cannot be created because there are no remaining folder numbers that can be used.
(P154)
> Format the card after saving necessary data on a PC etc. (P38) If you execute
[NO.RESET] in the [SETUP] menu after formatting, the folder number is reset to 100.
(P36)
[PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 4:3 TV]/[PICTURE IS DISPLAYED FOR 16:9 TV]
• The AV cable is connected to the camera.
> Press [MENU/SET] if you want to delete this message at once.
> Select [TV ASPECT] in the [SETUP] menu if you want to change the TV aspect. (P36)
• This message also appears when the USB connection cable is connected to the camera only.
In this case, connect the other end of the USB connection cable to a PC or a printer. (P153,
155)
[PRINTER BUSY]/[PLEASE CHECK THE PRINTER]
• The printer cannot print.
> Check the printer.
[NO BATTERY POWER REMAINS]
• The remaining battery power is low.
> Charge the battery.
[THIS BATTERY CANNOT BE USED]
• The battery cannot be recognized by the camera.
> Use a genuine Panasonic battery. If this message is displayed even when a genuine
Panasonic battery is used, contact the dealer or your nearest Service Center.
• The battery cannot be recognized as its terminal is dirty.
> Remove any dirt etc. from the terminal.
[PLEASE MAKE SURE TO TURN ON THE POWER OF EXTERNAL MICROPHONE.]
• When attaching the stereo microphone (DMW-MS1; optional), check the battery status and
make sure the power is on before use. (P162)
172
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 173 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Troubleshooting
First, try out the following procedures (P173–180).
If the problem is not resolved, it may be improved by selecting [RESET] (P36) on the
[SETUP] menu.
Battery and power source
The camera cannot be operated even when it is turned on.
• The battery is not inserted correctly. (P24)
• The battery is exhausted.
• Charge the battery.
• AC adaptor is not connected properly. (P25)
The LCD monitor turns off while the camera is turned on.
• Is the display set to Viewfinder?
> Press [LVF/LCD] button to switch to LCD monitor display. (P41)
• Is [AUTO LCD OFF] (P33) of the [ECONOMY] mode active?
> Press the shutter button halfway to cancel these modes.
• Is the LCD monitor switched off?
> Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P61)
• The battery is exhausted.
• Charge the battery.
The camera turns off immediately after it is turned on.
• The battery is exhausted.
• Charge the battery.
• If you leave the camera on, the battery will be exhausted.
> Turn the camera off frequently by using the [ECONOMY] mode etc. (P33)
This unit is turned off automatically.
• If you connect to a TV compatible with VIERA Link with a HDMI mini cable (optional) and turn
off the power on the TV with the remote control for the TV, the power on this unit also turns off.
> If you are not using VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF]. (P37)
The [CHARGE] lamp flashes.
• Is the temperature of the battery excessively high or low? If it is, it will take longer than usual to
charge the battery or charging may remain incomplete.
• Are the terminals of the charger or battery dirty?
> Wipe off the dirt using a dry cloth.
VQT2A61
173
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 174 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Recording
The picture cannot be recorded.
The shutter does not activate.
• Is the mode dial correctly set?
• Is the card inserted?
• Is there any memory remaining on the card?
> Delete the pictures which are not necessary to increase the available memory. (P59)
• Is the subject focused?
> At the time of purchase, the camera is set so that you cannot take a picture until the subject
is brought into focus. If you want to be able to take a picture when you press the shutter
button fully even if the subject is not focused, set [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM
MENU] menu to [OFF]. (P128)
The recorded picture is whitish.
• Picture might look whitish when lens or image sensor gets dirty with finger print or similar.
> If the lens is dirty turn the camera off and then gently wipe the lens surface with a soft dry
cloth.
> Refer to P167 when the image sensor gets dirty.
The recorded picture is too bright or dark.
> Check that the exposure is correctly compensated. (P71)
• Is the AE lock (P81) applied in inappropriate way?
2 or 3 pictures are taken at one time.
> Unset the settings of White Balance Bracket (P85).
The subject is not focused properly.
• The subject is beyond the focus range of the camera. (P51)
• There is camera shake (jitter) or the subject is moving slightly. (P53)
• Is [FOCUS PRIORITY] in the [CUSTOM MENU] menu set to [OFF]? (P128)
In this case, the picture may not be properly focused even if [AFS] or [AFC] in Focus Mode is
set.
• Is the AF lock (P81) applied in inappropriate way?
The recorded picture is blurred.
The Optical Image Stabilizer is not effective.
• The shutter speed will become slower and the Optical Image Stabilizer function may not work
properly when taking pictures especially in dark places.
> We recommend holding the camera firmly with both hands when taking pictures. (P39)
> We recommend using a tripod and the self-timer (P76) when taking pictures with a slow
shutter speed.
Taking pictures using White Balance Bracket is not possible.
• Is the number of recordable pictures 2 or less?
174
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 175 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
The recorded picture looks rough.
Noise appears on the picture.
• Is the ISO sensitivity high or the shutter speed slow?
(ISO sensitivity is set to [AUTO] when the camera is shipped. Therefore, when taking pictures
indoors etc. noise will appear.)
> Decrease the ISO sensitivity. (P86)
> Increase the setting for [NOISE RED.] in [FILM MODE] or lower the setting for each of the
items other than [NOISE RED.]. (P88)
> Take pictures in bright places.
> Set the [LONG SHTR NR] to [ON]. (P123)
The brightness or the hue of the recorded picture is different from the actual
scene.
• If recording under fluorescent light, the brightness or the hue may change slightly when the
shutter speed becomes fast. This occurs due to the characteristics of fluorescent light. It is not
a malfunction.
Reddish horizontal streaks appear on the LCD monitor during recording.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors. It appears
when the subject has a bright part. Some unevenness may occur in the surrounding areas, but
this is not a malfunction.
It is recorded in motion pictures but is not recorded on still pictures.
• It is recommended that you take pictures while taking care not to expose the screen to sunlight
or any other source of strong light.
Motion picture recording stops in the middle.
• It is recommended to use a card with SD Speed Class¢ with “Class 6” or higher when recording
motion pictures.
¢ SD speed class is the speed standard regarding continuous writing.
• Depending on the type of the card, recording may stop in the middle.
> When you set the picture quality to [
], [
] or [
], we recommend using a
high-speed card with “10MB/s” or greater displayed on the package.
> In the event that it stops even after using a “10MB/s” card or higher, the data writing speed
has deteriorated so it is recommended to make a backup and then format (P38).
You cannot compensate the exposure.
• Are you in Exposure Compensation operation?
> Press the front dial to switch to Exposure Compensation operation. (P71)
Subject cannot be locked.
(AF tracking not possible)
• Set the AF area to the distinctive color of the subject if there is a part that is different from the
surrounding color. (P78)
VQT2A61
175
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 176 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Lens
Recorded image may be warped, or nonexistent color is surrounding the
subject.
• Depending on the lens used, picture may be warped slightly or you may see colors along the
edge depending on the zoom factor, due to the characteristics of the lens. Also, the peripherals
of the image might look warped because the perspective is enhanced when the wide angle is
used. This is not a malfunction.
Flash
The flash is not activated.
• Is the flash closed?
> Slide the [ OPEN] lever to open the flash. (P65)
The flash is activated 2 times.
• The flash is activated 2 times. The interval between the first and second flash is longer when
Red-eye reduction (P66) is set so the subject should not move until the second flash is
activated.
LCD monitor/Viewfinder
The LCD monitor turns off although the camera is turned on.
• The LCD monitor turns off when [AUTO LCD OFF] (P33) is selected for the [ECONOMY] mode.
[This does not happen when using the AC adaptor (P25).]
If the remaining battery power is low, it may take longer for the flash to be charged, and the
time during which the LCD monitor is turned off may become longer.
• It will switch to viewfinder display if there is hand or object near the eye sensor. (P41)
The LCD monitor/Viewfinder is too bright or dark.
> Adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor/viewfinder to a proper level. (P35)
• [POWER LCD] is activated. (P35)
The picture is not displayed on the LCD monitor.
• Does the picture appear on the Viewfinder?
> Press [LVF/LCD] to switch to LCD monitor display. (P41)
• Is the LCD monitor switched off?
> Switch the display by pressing [DISPLAY]. (P61)
LCD monitor and viewfinder do not switch when [LVF/LCD] is pressed.
• Is the [EXPO. SETTINGS] set to [SWITCH BY PRESSING THE LVF/LCD BUTTON]? (P129)
• It is only displayed on the LCD monitor when the camera is connected to a PC or printer.
Black, red, blue and green dots appear on the LCD monitor.
• This is not a malfunction.
These pixels do not affect the recorded pictures.
176
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 177 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Noise appears on the LCD monitor.
• In dark places, noise may appear to maintain the brightness of the LCD monitor. This does not
affect the pictures you are recording.
The LCD monitor flickers indoors.
• The LCD monitor may flicker for a few seconds after turning the camera on indoors under
fluorescent light. This is not a malfunction.
A flickering horizontal line appears on the LCD monitor under fluorescent light.
• This is characteristic of MOS sensors which serve as the camera’s pickup sensors.
This is not a malfunction.
You see red, green, or blue flashes when you move your eyes in the viewfinder,
or when the camera is moved rapidly.
• This is a characteristic of the drive system of the viewfinder of this unit, and it is not a
malfunction. There will be no problem with the recorded image.
Playback
The picture being played back is not rotated, or is rotated in an unexpected
direction, when displayed.
• You can display the pictures without being rotated when [ROTATE DISP.] (P141) is set to
[OFF].
• You can rotate pictures with the [ROTATE] function. (P141)
• You can only display the pictures rotated if you use a lens (P15) that supports the direction
detection function (P40) and [ROTATE DISP.] is set to [ON].
The picture is not played back.
• Did you press [(]?
• Is the card inserted?
• Is there a picture on the card?
• Is this a picture whose file name has been changed in the PC? If it is, it cannot be played back
by this unit.
The recorded pictures are not displayed.
• Has [PLAYBACK MODE] been set for playback?
> Change to [NORMAL PLAY]. (P134)
The folder number and the file number are displayed as [—] and the screen turns
black.
• Is this a non-standard picture, a picture which has been edited using a PC or a picture which
was taken by another make of digital camera?
• Did you remove the battery immediately after picture-taking or did you take the picture using a
battery with a low remaining charge?
> Format the data to delete the pictures mentioned above. (P38)
(Other pictures will be deleted as well and it will not be possible to restore them.
Therefore, check well before formatting.)
VQT2A61
177
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 178 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Images with different date as recorded date are played back in the Calendar
Playback.
• Is the clock in the camera set properly? (P28)
• Images edited on a PC or images recorded on other cameras might display a different date to
the recorded date during the Calendar Playback.
White round spots like soap bubbles appear on the recorded picture.
• If you take a picture with the flash in a dark place or indoors, white round
spots may appear on the picture caused by the flash reflecting of particles of
dust in the air. This is not a malfunction.
A characteristic of this is that the number of round spots and their position
differ in every picture.
[THUMBNAIL IS DISPLAYED] appears on the screen.
• Is it a picture that has been recorded with other equipment? In such cases, these pictures may
be displayed with a deteriorated picture quality.
Red part of the recorded image has changed color to black.
• When the flash is set to red-eye reduction ([
], [
], [
]) and if you take a picture of
subject with red color surrounded by a skin tone color, that red part may be corrected to black
by the digital red-eye reduction function.
> It is recommended to take pictures with the [D.RED-EYE] set to [OFF]. (P120)
A clicking sound is recorded in the motion pictures.
• This unit automatically adjusts the aperture during motion picture recording. A clicking sound
may occur at this time depending on the lens, and this sound may be recorded on the motion
pictures. This is not a malfunction.
• The operational sound of the zoom or button operation may be recorded when it is operated
during the recording of a motion picture.
TV, PC and printer
The picture does not appear on the television.
• Is the camera connected to the TV correctly?
> Set the TV input to external input mode.
• Output from the [HDMI] socket is not possible when it is connected to the PC or the printer.
> Connect it only to the TV.
The display areas on the TV screen and the camera’s LCD monitor are different.
• Depending on the TV model, the pictures may be extended horizontally or vertically or they
may be displayed with their edges cut off.
The motion pictures cannot be played back on a TV.
• Are you trying to play back the motion pictures by directly inserting the card in the card slot of
the TV?
> Connect the camera to the TV with the AV cable (supplied), or with the HDMI mini cable
(optional), and then play back the motion pictures on the camera. (P146, 147)
178
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 179 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
> Motion pictures recorded in [AVCHD] can be played back on Panasonic televisions
(VIERA) with the AVCHD logo.
The picture is not displayed fully on the TV.
> Check [TV ASPECT] setting. (P36)
VIERA Link does not work.
• Is it connected properly with the HDMI mini cable (optional)? (P147)
> Confirm that the HDMI mini-cable (optional) is firmly fitted.
> Press [(] on this unit.
• Is the [VIERA Link] on this unit set to [ON]? (P37)
> Depending on HDMI terminal of the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In
this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch input. (For details on how to switch
input, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)
> Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.
> Turn the power to the unit off and then back on again.
> Set [VIERA Link] to [Off] on the TV and then turn it back to [On]. (Refer to the operating
instructions of the TV for details.)
The picture cannot be transferred when the camera is connected to a PC.
• Is the camera connected to the PC correctly?
• Is the camera recognized by the PC correctly?
> Set to [PC] in [USB MODE]. (P36, 153)
The card is not recognized by the PC.
> Disconnect the USB connection cable. Connect it again while the card is inserted in the
camera.
The picture cannot be printed when the camera is connected to a printer.
• Pictures cannot be printed using a printer which does not support PictBridge.
> Set to [PictBridge(PTP)] in [USB MODE]. (P36, 155)
The ends of the pictures are cut at printing.
> When using a printer with a trimming or borderless printing function, cancel this function
before printing. (For details, refer to the operating instructions for the printer.)
> When you order photo studios to print pictures, ask the photo studio if the pictures can be
printed with both ends.
Others
There is a sound from lens unit.
• It is a sound of lens movement or aperture operation when the power is turned [ON] or [OFF],
and it is not a malfunction.
• You may hear a sound from the lens and image in the LCD monitor may suddenly change when
the brightness has changed by zoom operation or moving the camera, but there is no effect on
recording.
The sound is caused by the automatic adjustment of the aperture. This is not a malfunction.
VQT2A61
179
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 180 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
An unreadable language was selected by mistake.
> Press [MENU/SET], select the [SETUP] menu icon [
the desired language. (P37)
] and then select the [~] icon to set
Part of the picture is flashing in black and white.
• This is a highlight function showing the white saturated area. (P34)
• Is the [HIGHLIGHT] set to [ON]?
A red lamp sometimes turns on when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• In dark places, the AF assist lamp (P128) lights red to make it easier to focus on a subject.
The AF assist lamp does not turn on.
• Is [AF ASSIST LAMP] on the [CUSTOM MENU] menu set to [ON]? (P128)
• The AF assist lamp does not turn on in bright places.
The camera becomes warm.
• The surface of the camera and the reverse side of the LCD monitor may become warm during
use. This does not affect the performance or quality of the camera.
The clock is reset.
• If you do not use the camera for a long time, the clock may be reset.
> When the message [PLEASE SET THE CLOCK] appears, set the clock again. When you
take a picture before setting the clock, [AM12:00 0. 0. 0] is recorded. (P28)
The file numbers are not recorded consecutively.
• When you perform an operation after taking a certain action, the pictures may be recorded in
folders with different numbers from the ones used prior to the operation. (P154)
The file numbers are recorded in ascending order.
• If the battery was inserted or removed without first turning the camera’s power off, the folder
and file numbers for the pictures taken will not be stored in the memory. When the power is
then turned back on and pictures are taken, they may be stored under file numbers which
should have been assigned to previous pictures.
Age is not displayed correctly.
• Check the clock (P28) and birthday settings (P99).
180
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 181 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Others
Number of Recordable Pictures and Available
Recording Time
• The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time are an approximation.
(These vary depending on the recording conditions and the type of card.)
• The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time varies depending on the
subjects.
∫ Number of recordable pictures
X
Aspect ratio
: 4000k3000 pixels
(12 million pixels)
Picture size
Quality
Card
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
: 2816k2112 pixels
(5.9 million pixels)
A
›
3
7
0
1
A
6
›
14
1
1
7
16
2
3
15
31
3
3
17
35
5
6
32
64
6
7
34
71
11
13
63
127
13
14
29
70
142
22
26
128
254
26
143
286
45
54
257
510
52
59
291
578
92
110
523
1023
107
120
573
1137
182
216
1030
2010
212
235
872
1729
277
329
1566
3056
322
358
1168
2315
371
440
2097
4092
432
480
1762
3493
559
664
3165
6173
651
724
2351
4660
747
886
4222
8235
869
966
4719
9350
1499
1779
8471
16520
1744
1939
VQT2A61
181
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 182 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
X
Aspect ratio
Picture size
Quality
Card
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
Y
: 2048k1536 pixels
(3.1 million pixels)
: 4128k2752 pixels
(11.4 million pixels)
A
›
17
35
1
1
A
3
7
0
1
37
74
3
3
8
17
2
3
77
152
7
8
17
36
5
7
152
297
15
15
36
73
11
14
303
591
30
31
73
146
23
28
609
1183
60
63
148
294
47
57
1228
2362
122
128
301
595
97
116
2412
4640
240
252
593
1170
191
228
3668
7056
366
384
902
1780
292
347
4911
9445
490
514
1208
2383
391
465
7408
14248
739
776
1823
3595
590
702
9882
19006
986
1035
2433
4796
787
937
19825
38127
1978
2078
4881
9623
1580
1880
Y
Aspect ratio
: 2928k1952 pixels
(5.7 million pixels)
Picture size
Quality
Card
182
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
VQT2A61
›
: 2064k1376 pixels
(2.8 million pixels)
A
›
A
›
6
14
1
1
19
38
1
15
31
3
3
41
80
3
4
32
64
6
7
85
165
8
8
1
64
127
13
15
168
323
16
16
128
254
27
31
334
641
32
33
259
510
55
62
670
1284
64
67
523
1023
113
126
1334
2560
130
137
1030
2010
222
249
2622
5027
256
269
1566
3056
338
378
3987
7644
390
409
2097
4092
453
507
5338
10233
522
548
3165
6173
684
765
8052
15435
788
826
4222
8235
913
1020
10742
20590
1051
1102
8471
16520
1832
2047
21549
41304
2109
2212
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 183 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
W
Aspect ratio
: 4352k2448 pixels
(10.7 million pixels)
Picture size
Quality
Card
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
A
›
3
8
1
1
6
14
1
1
8
18
2
3
15
31
3
4
18
38
6
7
32
66
7
8
37
75
12
15
65
130
14
16
75
151
25
30
130
259
29
33
152
303
50
60
262
519
58
66
Card
›
613
103
123
533
1040
119
134
611
1205
203
242
1048
2044
235
265
930
1833
308
369
1594
3108
358
403
1245
2454
413
494
2134
4161
480
539
1879
3703
624
746
3220
6278
724
814
2507
4940
832
996
4295
8374
966
1085
5030
9911
1671
1998
8618
16800
1939
2178
W
: 1920k1080 pixels
(2.1 million pixels)
Picture size
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
A
310
Aspect ratio
Quality
: 3072k1728 pixels
(5.3 million pixels)
: 2992k2992 pixels
(9.0 million pixels)
A
›
A
›
26
52
2
2
4
10
1
1
56
108
4
4
10
22
3
4
115
222
8
9
23
48
7
8
226
434
17
18
47
95
14
17
449
862
35
36
95
189
29
34
900
1725
70
73
191
381
59
70
1806
3413
142
148
390
766
120
141
3548
6704
280
291
767
1507
236
279
5395
10193
426
443
1167
2292
359
424
7222
13644
571
593
1563
3068
482
568
10895
20581
861
894
2358
4629
727
857
14534
27454
1149
1193
3146
6176
970
1143
29155
55073
2305
2394
6312
12390
1947
2294
VQT2A61
183
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 184 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Aspect ratio
: 2112k2112 pixels
(4.5 million pixels)
Picture size
Quality
Card
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
Aspect ratio
Quality
Card
184
32 MB
64 MB
128 MB
256 MB
512 MB
1 GB
2 GB
4 GB
6 GB
8 GB
12 GB
16 GB
32 GB
VQT2A61
: 1504k1504 pixels
(2.3 million pixels)
A
›
12
25
1
2
A
24
›
48
2
2
26
52
4
4
52
100
4
5
54
108
8
9
107
204
9
10
108
213
17
19
210
399
19
20
215
424
35
38
418
793
38
40
433
850
71
78
838
1589
77
81
876
1706
145
158
1660
3072
157
165
1722
3351
285
310
3260
6033
310
324
2620
5095
434
472
4958
9173
471
493
3507
6821
581
632
6637
12280
631
660
5291
10290
877
954
10011
18523
952
995
7058
13726
1170
1273
13355
24708
1270
1328
14160
27535
2348
2554
26791
49565
2548
2664
X
Y
W
2
2
2
4
4
4
5
8
9
9
11
16
17
19
21
33
35
38
42
67
71
76
86
136
144
155
174
267
284
304
342
406
432
463
521
544
579
620
697
821
873
935
1052
2
1095
1165
1247
1403
2198
2338
2503
2816
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 185 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
∫ Available recording time (when recording motion pictures)
File format
[AVCHD]
[MOTION JPEG]
Recording quality
setting
32 MB
4s
64 MB
128 MB
Cannot be guaranteed in operation.
256 MB
Card
16 s
17 s
52 s
12 s
36 s
38 s
1 min
50 s
29 s
1 min
17 s
1 min
20 s
3 min
45 s
59 s
2 min
30 s
2 min
35 s
7 min
20 s
512 MB
3 min
00 s
3 min
00 s
4 min
00 s
7 min
00 s
2 min
00 s
5 min
00 s
5 min
10 s
14 min
40 s
1 GB
7 min
00 s
7 min
00 s
9 min
00 s
14 min
00 s
4 min
00 s
10 min
10 s
10 min
40 s
29 min
30 s
2 GB
15 min
00 s
15 min
00 s
20 min
00 s
29 min
00 s
8 min
20 s
20 min
50 s
21 min
40 s
1h
00 min
4 GB
30 min
00 s
30 min
00 s
40 min
00 s
1h
00 min
16 min
20 s
41 min
00 s
42 min
40 s
1h
58 min
6 GB
46 min
00 s
46 min
00 s
1h
00 min
1h
28 min
25 min
00 s
1h
02 min
1h
05 min
3h
00 min
8 GB
1h
00 min
1h
00 min
1h
20 min
1h
54 min
33 min
30 s
1h
23 min
1h
27 min
4h
01 min
12 GB
1h
34 min
1h
34 min
2h
00 min
2h
54 min
50 min
30 s
2h
06 min
2h
11 min
6h
04 min
16 GB
2h
00 min
2h
00 min
2h
40 min
4h
00 min
1h
07 min
2h
48 min
2h
55 min
8h
05 min
32 GB
4h
00 min
4h
00 min
5h
20 min
8h
00 min
2h
15 min
5h
38 min
5h
51 min
16 h
14 min
• Motion picture recorded continuously in [MOTION JPEG] is up to 2 GB. Only the maximum
recordable time for 2 GB is displayed on the screen. [AVCHD] can be recorded to the capacity
of the card.¢
¢ The recording may stop even if there is more space left in the card depending on the life of
the battery. (P22)
Note
• The number of recordable pictures and the available recording time displayed on the screen
may not decrease in order.
• If you set [EX. OPT. ZOOM] (P121) to [ON], [
] is displayed on the screen when the picture
size is set to a size other than the maximum picture size for each aspect ratio.
VQT2A61
185
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 186 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Specifications
Digital Camera Body
(DMC-GH1):
Information for your safety
Power Source:
DC 9.3 V
Power Consumption:
2.9 W (When recording with LCD Monitor)
2.7 W (When recording with Viewfinder)
2.0 W (When playing back with LCD Monitor)
1.8 W (When playing back with Viewfinder)
Camera effective pixels: 12,100,000 pixels
Image sensor:
4/3q Live MOS sensor, total pixel number 13,980,000 pixels,
Primary color filter
Digital zoom:
Max. 4k
Extended Optical Zoom: ON/OFF simple enlargement (compatible with lenses from
(Except for the maximum other manufacturers)
picture size for each
aspect ratio)
Focus:
Auto focus/Manual Focus, Face detection/AF Tracking/
23-area-focusing/1-area-focusing
Shutter system:
Focal-plane shutter
Burst recording
Burst speed:
3 pictures/second (High speed),
2 pictures/second (Low speed)
Number of recordable
pictures:
Max. 7 pictures (when there are RAW files)
Depends on the capacity of the card
(when there are no RAW files)
ISO sensitivity (Standard
Output Sensitivity):
AUTO/
/100/200/400/800/1600/3200
Shutter speed:
B (Bulb) (max. 4 minutes), 60 seconds to 1/4000th of a second
Metering range:
EV 0 to EV 18
White balance:
Auto white balance/Daylight/Cloudy/Shade/Incandescent lights/
Flash/White set1/White set2/White balance K set
Exposure (AE):
Program AE (P)/Aperture-priority AE (A)/Shutter-priority AE (S)/
Manual Exposure (M)/AUTO
Exposure Compensation (1/3 EV Step, j3 EV to i3 EV)
Metering mode:
Multiple/Center weighted/Spot
LCD monitor:
3.0q TFT LCD
(Approx. 460,000 dots) (field of view ratio about 100%)
Viewfinder:
Color LCD Viewfinder (Approx. 1,440,000 dots)
(field of view ratio about 100%)
(with diopter adjustment j4 to i4 diopter)
186
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 187 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Flash:
Flash synchronization
speed:
Microphone:
Speaker:
Recording media:
Picture size
Still picture:
Recording quality
Motion pictures:
Quality:
Recording file format
Still Picture:
Pictures with audio:
Built-in pop up flash
GN 11 equivalent (ISO100 · m)
Flash range:
Approx. 1.0 m (3.28 feet) to 4.8 m (15.8 feet)
(When the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K
is mounted, focal length is 22 mm, [ISO AUTO] is set, and the
aspect ratio is set to [X])
AUTO, AUTO/Red-eye reduction, Forced ON, Forced ON/
Red-eye reduction, Slow sync., Slow sync./Red-eye reduction,
Forced OFF
Equal to or smaller than 1/160th of a second
Stereo
Monaural
SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card
When the aspect ratio setting is [X]
4000k3000 pixels, 2816k2112 pixels, 2048k1536 pixels
When the aspect ratio setting is [Y]
4128k2752 pixels, 2928k1952 pixels, 2064k1376 pixels
When the aspect ratio setting is [W]
4352k2448 pixels, 3072k1728 pixels, 1920k1080 pixels
When the aspect ratio setting is [ ]
2992k2992 pixels, 2112k2112 pixels, 1504k1504 pixels
[AVCHD] (With stereo audio)
When set to [FHD]: 1920k1080 pixels (60i recording/17 Mbps)
(Sensor output is 24 frames/sec.)/
When set to [SH]: 1280k720 pixels (60p recording/17 Mbps)/
When set to [H]: 1280k720 pixels (60p recording/13 Mbps)/
When set to [L]: 1280k720 pixels (60p recording/9 Mbps)
[MOTION JPEG] (With stereo audio)
When set to [HD]: 1280k720 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/
When set to [WVGA]: 848k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/
When set to [VGA]: 640k480 pixels (30 frames/sec.)/
When set to [QVGA]: 320k240 pixels (30 frames/sec.)
RAW/RAWiFine/RAWiStandard/Fine/Standard
JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based
on “Exif 2.21” standard)/DPOF corresponding
JPEG (based on “Design rule for Camera File system”, based
on “Exif 2.21” standard)r“QuickTime” (pictures with audio)
Motion pictures with
audio:
AVCHD/QuickTime Motion JPEG
Interface
Digital:
“USB 2.0” (High Speed)
Analog video/audio: NTSC,
Audio line output (stereo)
VQT2A61
187
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 188 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Terminal
[MIC/REMOTE]:
[AV OUT/DIGITAL]:
[HDMI]:
[DC IN]:
Dimensions:
Mass (weight):
φ 2.5 mm jack
Dedicated jack (14 pin)
MiniHDMI TypeC (1.3a corresponding)
None (when using an AC adaptor, use supplied DC cable)
Approx. 124 mm (W)k89.6 mm (H)k45.2 mm (D)
[4 7/8q (W)k3 1/2q(H)k1 13/16q (D)] (excluding the projecting
parts)
Approx. 385 g/13.6 oz (camera body),
Approx. 903 g/31.9 oz
(with the 14 – 140 mm/F4.0 – 5.8 lens included in DMC-GH1K,
card and battery)
Operating temperature: 0 oC to 40 oC (32 oF to 104 oF)
Operating humidity:
Language select:
10% to 80%
[ENGLISH]/[FRANÇAIS]/[ESPAÑOL]/[PORTUGUÊS]
AC Adaptor (Panasonic DE-A49B):
Information for your safety
Input:
110 V to 240 V
Output:
DIGITAL CAMERA 9.3 V
CHARGE 8.4 V 0.65 A
50/60 Hz, 0.3 A
1.2 A
Battery Pack (lithium-ion) (Panasonic DMW-BLB13PP):
Information for your safety
Voltage/capacity
(Minimum):
188
VQT2A61
7.2 V/1250 mAh
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 189 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Interchangeable Lens (H-VS014140)
“LUMIX G VARIO HD 14 –140 mm/F4.0– 5.8 ASPH./MEGA O.I.S.”
Focal length:
f=14 mm to 140 mm
(35 mm film camera equivalent: 28 mm to 280 mm)
Aperture type:
7 leaf shutters/iris diaphragm/circular diaphragm
Aperture range:
F4.0 (Wide) to F5.8 (Tele)
Minimum aperture
value:
F22
Lens construction:
17 elements in 13 groups (4 non-spherical lenses/2 ED lenses)
In focus distance:
0.5 m (1.64 feet) to ¶ (from the focus distance reference line)
Maximum image
magnification:
0.2k (35 mm film camera equivalent: 0.4k)
Optical Image Stabilizer: Available
Mount:
“Micro Four Thirds Mount”
Angle of view:
75x (Wide) to 8.8x (Tele)
Filter diameter:
62 mm (2.44 inch)
Max. diameter:
Approx. 70 mm (2.76 inch)
Overall length:
Approx. 84 mm (3.31 inch)
(from the tip of the lens to the base side of the lens mount)
Approx. 460 g (16.2 oz)
Mass (weight):
VQT2A61
189
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 190 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Others
Digital Camera Accessory System
Accessory#
Description
Figure
DMW-BLB13PP
Lithum Ion Battery
DMW-FL220
DMW-FL360
DMW-FL500
Flash
H-FS045200
H-FS014045
H-F007014
Interchangeable Lens
: DMW-LMCH62
: DMW-LND62
: DMW-LPL62
: MC Protector
: ND Filter
: PL Filter (Circular Type)
DMW-RSL1
Remote Shutter
DMW-MS1
Stereo Microphone
DMW-BAG1
Soft Bag
DMW-SSTG1
DMW-SSTG2
DMW-SSTG3
Shoulder Strap
RP-CDHM15
RP-CDHM30
HDMI mini Cable
DMW-MA1
Mount Adaptor
RP-SDV32GU1K
RP-SDV16GU1K
RP-SDM12GU1K
RP-SDV08GU1K
RP-SDM06GU1K
RP-SDM04GU1K
RP-SDV04GU1K
RP-SDM02GU1A
RP-SDV02GU1A
RP-SDR01GU1A
32 GB SDHC Memory Card
16 GB SDHC Memory Card
12 GB SDHC Memory Card
8 GB SDHC Memory Card
6 GB SDHC Memory Card
4 GB SDHC Memory Card
4 GB SDHC Memory Card
2 GB SD Memory Card
2 GB SD Memory Card
1 GB SD Memory Card
¢ We recommend to use these filters for the lens included in DMC-GH1K.
If you are using other lenses, please use the filters compatible with that lens.
• Read P15 for information about other lenses that can be used.
• Refer to P22 for information about the battery charging time and the number of recordable pictures.
• NOTE: Accessories and/or model numbers may vary between countries. Consult your local dealer.
190
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 191 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Digital Camera Accessory Order Form
(For USA and Puerto Rico Customers)
Please photocopy this form when placing an order.
1. Digital Camera Model #
2. Items Ordered
Accessory #
Description
Price Each
Quantity
Total Price
Subtotal
Your State & Local Sales Tax
Shipping & Handling
6.95
Total Enclosed
3. Method of payment (check one)
Check of Money Order enclosed (NO C.O.D.SHIPMENTS)
VISA
Credit Card #
MasterCard
Expiration Date
Discover
Customer Signature
Make Check or Money Order to: PANASONIC ACCESSORIES
(Please do not send cash)
4. Shipping information (UPS delivery requires complete street address)
Ship To:
Mr.
Mrs.
Ms.
First
Phone#:
Last
Day
(
)
Night
(
)
Street Address
City
State
Zip
TO OBTAIN ANY OF OUR DIGITAL CAMERA ACCESSORIES YOU CAN DO ANY OF
THE FOLLOWING:
VISIT YOUR LOCAL PANASONIC DEALER
OR
CALL PANASONIC’S ACCESSORY ORDER LINE AT 1-800-332-5368
[6 AM-6 PM M-F, PACIFIC TIME]
OR
MAIL THIS ORDER TO: PANASONIC SERVICE AND TECHNOLOGY COMPANY
ACCESSORY ORDER OFFICE
20421 84th Avenue South Kent, WA. 98032
In CANADA, please contact your local Dealer for more information about accessories.
VQT2A61
191
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 192 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Request for Service Notice (For USA and Puerto Rico Only)
Please photocopy this form when making a request for service notice.
In the unlikely event this product needs service.
include your proof of purchase.
Request for Service Notice: • Please
(Failure to do so will delay your repair.)
(USA and Puerto Rico Only)
• To further speed your repair, please provide
an explanation of what wrong with the unit
and any symptom it is exhibiting.
Mail this completed form and your Proof of Purchase along with your unit to:
Panasonic Camera and Digital Service Center
1590 Touhy Ave.
Elk Grove Village, IL 60007
192
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 193 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Limited Warranty (For USA and Puerto Rico Only)
PANASONIC CONSUMER ELECTRONICS COMPANY, DIVISION OF PANASONIC
CORPORATION OF NORTH AMERICA
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Panasonic Digital Still Camera
Limited Warranty
Limited Warranty Coverage
If your product does not work properly because of a defect in materials or workmanship,
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company (referred to as “the warrantor”) will, for the
length of the period indicated on the chart below, which starts with the date of original
purchase (“warranty period”), at its option either (a) repair your product with new or
refurbished parts, or (b) replace it with a new or refurbished product. The decision to repair
or replace will be made by the warrantor.
PRODUCT OR PART NAME
PARTS
LABOR
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
(EXCEPT ITEMS LISTED
BELOW)
1 (ONE) YEAR
1 (ONE) YEAR
CCD
6 (SIX) MONTHS
90 (NINETY) DAYS
RECHARGEABLE BATTERY
PACK
(IN EXCHANGE FOR
DEFECTIVE BATTERY PACK)
90 (NINETY) DAYS
NOT APPLICABLE
SD MEMORY CARD
(IN EXCHANGE FOR
DEFECTIVE SD CARD)
90 (NINETY) DAYS
NOT APPLICABLE
During the “Labor” warranty period there will be no charge for labor. During the “Parts”
warranty period, there will be no charge for parts. You must carry-in or mail-in your product
during the warranty period. If non-rechargeable batteries are included, they are not
warranted. This warranty only applies to products purchased and serviced in the United
States or Puerto Rico. This warranty is extended only to the original purchaser of a new
product which was not sold “as is”. A purchase receipt or other proof of the original
purchase date is required for warranty service.
VQT2A61
193
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 194 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Carry-In or Mail-In Service
For Carry-In or Mail-In Service in the United States and Puerto Rico call
1-800-211-PANA (7262).
This warranty ONLY COVERS failures due to defects in materials or workmanship, and
DOES NOT COVER normal wear and tear or cosmetic damage. The warranty ALSO
DOES NOT COVER damages which occurred in shipment, or failures which are caused
by products not supplied by the warrantor, or failures which result from accidents, misuse,
abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration, faulty installation, set-up
adjustments, misadjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance, power line
surge, lightning damage, modification, or commercial use (such as in a hotel, office,
restaurant, or other business), rental use of the product, service by anyone other than a
Factory Service center or other Authorized Servicer, or damage that is attributable to acts
of God.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES EXCEPT AS LISTED UNDER “LIMITED
WARRANTY COVERAGE”. THE WARRANTOR IS NOT LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR
ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY. (As examples, this excludes
damages for lost time, travel to and from the servicer, loss of media or images, data or
other memory content. The items listed are not exclusive, but are for illustration only.) ALL
EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, ARE LIMITED TO THE PERIOD OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential
damages, or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the exclusions may not
apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary
from state to state. If a problem with this product develops during or after the warranty
period, you may contact your dealer or Service center. If the problem is not handled to
your satisfaction, then write to the warrantor’s Consumer Affairs Department at the
addresses listed for the warrantor.
PARTS AND SERVICE WHICH ARE NOT COVERED BY THIS LIMITED WARRANTY
ARE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
194
VQT2A61
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 195 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Customer Services Directory (For USA and Puerto Rico Only)
Obtain Product Information and Operating Assistance; locate your nearest
Dealer or Service Center; purchase Parts and Accessories; or make
Customer Service and Literature requests by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.panasonic.com/help
or, contact us via the web at:
http://www.panasonic.com/contactinfo
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-211-PANA (7262),
Monday-Friday 9 am-9 pm; Saturday-Sunday 10 am-7 pm, EST
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY :1-877-833-8855
Accessory Purchases (United States and Puerto Rico)
Purchase Parts, Accessories and Instruction Books online for all Panasonic
Products by visiting our Web Site at:
http://www.pstc.panasonic.com
or, send your request by E-mail to:
npcparts@us.panasonic.com
You may also contact us directly at:
1-800-332-5368 (Phone) 1-800-237-9080 (Fax Only)
(Monday - Friday 9 am to 9 pm, EST.)
PANASONIC SERVICE AND TECHNOLOGY COMPANY
20421 84th Avenue South, Kent, WA 98032
(We Accept Visa, MasterCard, Discover Card, American Express,
and Personal Checks)
For hearing or speech impaired TTY users, TTY :1-866-605-1277
Product Repairs (United States and Puerto Rico)
Centralized Factory Service Center
MAIL TO :
Panasonic Camera and Digital Service Center
1590 Touhy Ave.
Elk Grove Village, IL 60007
Please carefully pack and ship, prepaid and insured, to the Elk Grove Village
Centralized Factory Service Center.
As of October 2008
VQT2A61
195
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 196 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Others
Index
A
AC Adaptor ...................... 21, 25, 153, 155
Access Indication ................................... 27
Advanced Scene Mode ......................... 94
AF Assist Lamp ................................... 128
AF Mode ................................................ 77
AF Tracking ..................................... 47, 78
AF/AE Lock ............................................ 81
AF/AE Lock Hold ................................. 127
AFC ............... 44, 45, 51, 52, 77, 104, 108
AFrMF ................................................ 128
AFS ................ 44, 45, 51, 52, 77, 104, 108
Aperture-priority AE ............................... 90
Aspect Ratio ................................ 116, 181
Aspect Ratio Conversion ..................... 140
Audio Dubbing ..................................... 144
Audio Recording .......................... 104, 124
Auto Bracket .................................. 74, 122
Auto LCD Off ......................................... 33
Auto Power LCD .................................... 35
Auto Review .......................................... 34
Auto White Balance ............................... 83
AV cable .............................................. 146
Available Recording Time .............. 23, 185
B
Baby Mode ............................................ 99
Backlight Compensation .................. 46, 48
Battery ....................................... 21, 22, 24
Beep ...................................................... 35
Body Cap ............................................... 17
Built-in Flash .......................................... 65
Bulb ....................................................... 92
Burst Mode ............................................ 72
Burst Rate ...................................... 72, 122
C
Calendar Playback ................................ 58
Card ....................................................... 27
Center Weighted .................................. 119
Charger ................................................ 168
Charging .......................................... 21, 22
Cleaning .............................................. 166
Clock Set ......................................... 28, 33
Close-up Mode ...................................... 96
Color Space ................................. 122, 154
Color Temperature Setting .................... 84
196
VQT2A61
Condensation .......................................... 5
Continuous AF ..................................... 127
Creative Motion Picture Mode ............. 108
Custom Mode ...................................... 102
Custom Set Memory .................... 101, 125
D
Date Printing ................................ 143, 156
DC Cable ............................................... 25
DCF standard ........................................ 56
Deleting Pictures ................................... 59
Dial Guide ............................................ 130
Digital Red-eye Compensation ...... 66, 120
Digital Zoom .................................. 55, 121
Diopter Adjustment ................................ 41
Direct AF Area ..................................... 128
Direction Detection Function ................. 40
Dust Reduction Function ..................... 167
E
Economy Mode ...................................... 33
Exposure ............................................... 81
Exposure Compensation ................. 47, 71
Exposure Mode ........................... 108, 125
Exposure Setting ................................. 129
Extended Optical Zoom ................. 55, 121
External Flash ...................................... 159
External Microphone ............................ 162
Eye Cup ............................................... 167
Eye Sensor ............................................ 41
EZ .......................................... 55, 117, 185
F
Face Detection .......................... 46, 48, 77
Face Recognition ........... 47, 110, 118, 145
Favorite ................................................ 134
File Number ................................... 36, 154
Film Mode .............................................. 87
Fine ...................................................... 118
Flash .............................................. 65, 120
Flash Adjust ................................... 69, 121
Flash Synchro ................................ 70, 120
Fn Button Set ......................................... 33
Focus ............................................... 53, 81
Focus Distance Reference Mark ........... 81
Focus Priority ....................................... 128
Folder Composition ............................. 154
Folder Number ............................... 36, 154
Formatting ............................................. 38
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 197 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
G
Guide Line ......................................63, 126
Multiple .................................................119
My Color Mode .....................................100
My Menu ................................................29
H
N
HDMI mini Cable .................................. 147
HDMI Mode ............................................ 37
Highlight Display .................................... 34
Histogram ....................................... 64, 126
Hot shoe ....................................... 159, 162
ND Filter ...............................................160
Night Portrait Mode ................................97
NO.RESET .............................................36
Number of Prints ..................................157
Number of Recordable Pictures .....22, 181
I
O
Intelligent Auto Mode .............................45
Intelligent Exposure .............................121
Intelligent ISO ........................................ 86
Intelligent ISO sensitivity control ............87
ISO Increments .................................... 123
ISO Limit Set ........................................ 123
ISO Sensitivity ........................................ 86
Optical Image Stabilizer .................18, 119
Optical Zoom ..........................................55
J
Jitter ....................................................... 53
L
Language Setting ...................................37
Layout ..................................................157
LCD Display Style ................................ 126
LCD Information Display ...................... 126
LCD Mode ..............................................35
LCD Monitor ............................. 39, 61, 163
Lens ................................................. 15, 17
Lens Cap ................................................17
Lens Hood ..............................................20
Lens Rear Cap .......................................17
LONG SHUTTER NR ...........................123
LVF Display Style .................................126
LVF/LCD Auto ...................................... 126
M
Manual Exposure Assistance ................. 92
Manual Focus ........................................ 80
MC Protector ........................................ 160
Menu Resume ...................................... 130
Metering Mode .....................................119
MF ....................................................52, 80
MF Assist ....................................... 80, 129
Monitor/Viewfinder .................................35
Multi Film Bracket .................................. 89
Multi Playback ........................................ 57
P
Paper Size ...........................................157
Party Mode .............................................99
PC ..........................................................36
Personal Information ............................169
Pet Mode ..............................................100
PictBridge .............................................155
Picture Size ..................................117, 181
Pictures with Audio ......................131, 132
Pixel Refresh ........................................130
PL Filter ................................................160
Playback Mode ....................................134
Playback Pictures on TV ..............146, 147
Playback Zoom ......................................58
Playing Back Motion Pictures ..............131
Portrait Mode .........................................95
Power LCD .............................................35
Power Save ............................................33
Pre AF ..................................................127
Preview ..................................................93
Preview hold ........................................127
Print Setting .........................................142
Program AE ...........................................51
Program Shift .........................................54
Protect ..................................................143
Q
Quality ..........................................118, 181
Quick AF ..............................................127
Quick Menu ............................................32
VQT2A61
197
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 198 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
R
V
RAW .................................................... 118
RAWiFine .......................................... 118
RAWiStandard ................................... 118
Rec Area .............................................. 129
Rec Mode .................................... 105, 124
Recording Motion Picture .............. 48, 103
Recording Quality Setting
(Motion Picture Mode) ......... 105, 125, 185
Remaining Display ............................... 129
Remote Shutter ................................... 161
Reset of Setting ..................................... 36
Resizing ............................................... 138
Rotate .................................................. 141
Rotate Display ..................................... 141
Version Display ...................................... 37
VIERA Link .................................... 37, 148
Viewfinder ........................................ 41, 61
Volume of Speakers .............................. 35
S
Scene Detection .............................. 46, 48
Scene Menu .......................................... 35
Scene Mode .......................................... 98
Scenery Mode ....................................... 95
Self-timer ....................................... 76, 122
Sensor Cleaning .................................. 130
Setup Menu ........................................... 33
Shoot without lens ............................... 130
Shoulder Strap ....................................... 19
Shutter-priority AE ................................. 90
Slide Show ........................................... 132
Sound .................................................... 35
Sports Mode .......................................... 96
Spot ..................................................... 119
Standard .............................................. 118
Status Indicator ...................................... 42
Stereo Microphone .............................. 162
Sunset Mode ......................................... 98
T
Text Stamp .......................................... 136
Thumbnail ............................................ 178
Title Edit ............................................... 135
Travel Date .................................... 33, 113
Trimming .............................................. 139
Tripods ................................................. 170
TV Aspect .............................................. 36
U
USB Connection Cable ................ 153, 155
USB Mode ............................................. 36
198
VQT2A61
W
White Balance ....................................... 83
White Balance Bracket .......................... 85
White Balance Fine Adjustment ............ 85
Wind cut ....................................... 107, 125
World Time .................................... 33, 115
Z
Zoom ............................................. 55, 121
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 199 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
Others
Others
Useful Information (For Latin American Countries Only)
Customer Service
Customer Service Directory
Obtain information products and operative assistant; localize the closer distributor or
Service Center; buy spare parts and accessories by our web site to Latin American:
http://www.lar.panasonic.com
Also you may contact us directly by our Contact Center:
Panama
Colombia
Ecuador
Costa Rica
El Salvador
Guatemala
Chile
Venezuela
Uruguay
800-PANA (800-7262)
1-8000-94PANA (1-8000-947262) - National Line
635-PANA (635-7262) - Bogota Line
1800-PANASONIC (1800-726276)
800-PANA737 (800-7262737)
800-PANA (800-7262)
1-801-811-PANA (1-801-811-7262)
800-260602
From a cell phone: 245-2520
800-PANA-800 (800-7262-800)
0-800-PANA (0800-7262)
Mexico Service
To obtain information in the Republic of Mexico contact us at:
email: atencion.clientes@mx.panasonic.com
Or you may contact us in the next following phones numbers:
01800-VIP-PANA (01800-847-7262) - Interior
(55) 5000-1200 - Mexico D.F. and Metropolitan Area
VQT2A61
199
DMC-GH1KPP-VQT2A61_eng.book 200 ページ
2009年4月14日 火曜日 午後2時45分
• G MICRO SYSTEM is a lens exchange type digital
camera system of LUMIX based on a Micro Four Thirds
System standard.
• Micro Four Thirds™ and Micro Four Thirds Logo marks
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus
Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
• Four Thirds™ and Four Thirds Logo marks are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Olympus
Imaging Corporation, in Japan, the United States, the
European Union and other countries.
• SDHC Logo is a trademark.
• “AVCHD” and the “AVCHD” Logo are trademarks of
Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
• HDMI, the HDMI Logo and the High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are the registered trademarks or
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
• VIERA Link™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• EZ Sync™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
• QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc.,
used under license therefrom.
• Adobe is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries.
• Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
• Other names, company names, and product names printed in these instructions are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the companies concerned.
This product is licensed under the AVC patent portfolio license for the personal and
non-commercial use of a consumer to (i) encode video in compliance with the AVC Standard
(“AVC Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a
personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to
provide AVC Video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional
information may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
For USA and Canada
Panasonic Consumer Electronics Company,
Division of Panasonic Corporation of North America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094
Panasonic Canada Inc.
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 2T3
 Panasonic Corporation 2009
P
Printed in China
VQT2A61
F0409SM0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising